R&S ZNB Series User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. R&S Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZNB Series
  6. User manual

R&S ZNB Series User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
ZNB/ZNBT
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;×éÍ2)
1173916302
Version 62

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for R&S ZNB Series

Summary of Contents for R&S ZNB Series

  • Page 1 ® R&S ZNB/ZNBT Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;×éÍ2) 1173916302 Version 62...
  • Page 2 This document applies to the following vector network analyzer models and their options: ● ® R&S ZNB4, 9 kHz to 4.5 GHz, 2 test ports, order no. 1311.6010K22 ● ® R&S ZNB4, 9 kHz to 4.5 GHz, 2 test ports, order no. 1334.3330K22 ●...
  • Page 3 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............15 Safety instructions......................15 Warning messages in the documentation..............18 Korea certification class A..................18 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT............19 What's new in firmware version 3.45.................19 Documentation overview....................20 2.2.1 Getting started manual....................21 2.2.2 User manual and help....................
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 3.2.2 Front panel R&S ZNBT....................44 3.2.3 Rear panel R&S ZNB....................47 3.2.4 Rear panel R&S ZNBT....................49 Operating the instrument................... 51 3.3.1 Manual operation......................52 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window..............56 3.3.3 Touchscreen gestures....................62 3.3.4 Working with dialogs.....................
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 4.3.8 Group delay.........................143 Operations on traces....................144 4.4.1 Limit check........................144 4.4.2 Trace files........................151 4.4.3 Memory-mapped trace data transfer................160 Calibration......................... 162 4.5.1 Calibration types......................163 4.5.2 Calibration standards and calibration kits..............174 4.5.3 Calibration pool......................181 4.5.4 Calibration labels......................181 4.5.5...
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 4.7.15 Precision frequency reference..................255 4.7.16 GPIB interface......................256 4.7.17 Device control......................256 4.7.18 Handler I/O (universal interface)................. 256 4.7.19 RFFE GPIO interface....................257 4.7.20 Additional removable system drive................258 4.7.21 Extended power range....................258 4.7.22 Extended dynamic range.................... 259 4.7.23 Receiver step attenuators...................
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool......................328 5.4.1 Scale Values tab......................328 5.4.2 Scale Coupling tab...................... 330 5.4.3 Zoom tab........................331 Trace Config softtool....................333 5.5.1 Traces tab........................333 5.5.2 Mem tab........................338 5.5.3 All Mem All Data tab....................341 5.5.4 Math tab........................342 5.5.5 Time Domain tab......................
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 5.8.1 Stimulus tab........................ 414 5.8.2 Power tab........................415 5.8.3 Time Domain X-Axis tab....................418 Power Bw Avg softtool..................... 419 5.9.1 Power tab........................419 5.9.2 Bandwidth tab......................420 5.9.3 Average tab......................... 421 5.10 Sweep Softtool......................422 5.10.1 Sweep Params tab......................423 5.10.2 Sweep Type tab......................
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 5.13.8 Ground Loop tab......................646 5.13.9 Differential Match tab....................649 5.13.10 Config tab........................650 5.13.11 Deembed Assistant tab....................652 5.13.12 Delta-L tab........................661 5.14 File softtool........................668 5.14.1 Recall sets tab......................669 5.14.2 Favorites tab....................... 673 5.14.3 Print tab........................674 5.14.4 Printer Setup dialog.....................675 5.14.5 Trace Data tab......................676...
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6 Remote control...................803 Introduction to remote control.................803 6.1.1 Remote control via USB....................804 6.1.2 Starting a remote control session................805 6.1.3 GPIB Explorer......................805 6.1.4 Switchover to remote control..................807 6.1.5 Combining manual and remote control............... 810 Messages........................811 6.2.1 Device messages (commands and device responses)..........
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 7.1.3 Parameters........................841 7.1.4 Numeric suffixes......................841 Common commands....................842 SCPI command reference..................843 7.3.1 CALCulate commands....................844 7.3.2 CONFigure commands..................... 1065 7.3.3 CONTrol commands....................1074 7.3.4 DIAGnostic commands..................... 1097 7.3.5 DISPlay commands....................1099 7.3.6 FORMat commands....................1125 7.3.7 HCOPy commands....................1126 7.3.8 INITiate commands....................
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 8.1.2 Channel, trace and diagram handling............... 1493 Condensed programming examples..............1499 8.2.1 Path-independent remote control programs..............1500 8.2.2 Trace and diagram handling..................1500 8.2.3 Using markers......................1509 8.2.4 Data handling......................1511 8.2.5 Calibration......................... 1515 8.2.6 Mixer measurement....................1522 8.2.7 RFFE/GPIO interface programming................1524 8.2.8...
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 12.4 Showroom mode..................... 1554 12.5 ENA emulation commands..................1555 Glossary: Frequently used terms........... 1563 List of commands................1569 Index....................1596 User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 15 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB/ZNBT Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following chapters. Intended use The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
  • Page 16 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB/ZNBT Safety instructions age, gender and physical condition. Look up the maximum weight in the data sheet. Use the product handles to move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the prod- uct.
  • Page 17 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB/ZNBT Safety instructions connect it from the power source. How to change the fuse is described in the prod- uct documentation. ● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe- cific safety requirements.
  • Page 18 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNB/ZNBT Korea certification class A 1.2 Warning messages in the documentation A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig- nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do not follow the safety precautions.
  • Page 19 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT R&S ZNB/ZNBT What's new in firmware version 3.45 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT This manual is intended to provide you with all information that is necessary for setup, manual and remote control of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. We also invite you to find out what's new in the current revision of the software and learn how to make best use of our documentation and of the help system.
  • Page 20 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT R&S ZNB/ZNBT Documentation overview New "Reset" buttons in "Advanced Settings" dialogs. ● External switch matrices: Support for R&S OSP added Solved issues ● Remote automatic calibration: Visualization not shown ● Calibration units R&S ZV-Zxx not detected by 2nd generation R&S ZNB ●...
  • Page 21 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT R&S ZNB/ZNBT Documentation overview 2.2.1 Getting started manual Introduces the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and describes how to set up and start working with the product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general infor- mation, e.g. safety instructions, etc. A printed version is delivered with the instrument.
  • Page 22 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT R&S ZNB/ZNBT Documentation overview 2.2.6 Data sheets and brochures The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. It also lists the firmware applications and their order numbers, and optional accessories. The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char- acteristics.
  • Page 23 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ZNB/ZNBT Get- ting Started manual. ● Preparing for use.....................23 ● Instrument tour......................39 ● Operating the instrument..................51 ●...
  • Page 24 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use Electromagnetic compatibility classes The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet. ● Class B equipment is suitable for use in: –...
  • Page 25 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity.
  • Page 26 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use To unmount the R&S ZNB/ZNBT from a rack 1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets. 2. Remove the R&S ZNB/ZNBT from the rack. 3. If placing the R&S ZNB/ZNBT on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the R&S ZNB/ZNBT.
  • Page 27 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use Preventing electrostatic discharge (ESD) Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT. ► NOTICE! Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test (DUT). Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage: a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground.
  • Page 28 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use Risk of data loss due to voltage dips For a R&S ZNBT40 with 24 ports, a voltage dip with a duration of 18 ms or higher can cause a spontaneous reboot of the instrument. I.e. in its maximum configuration, the R&S ZNBT40 does not fully comply with standard EN 61326-2-1, chapter 6.4.101.
  • Page 29 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use To disconnect from power The R&S ZNB/ZNBT is in standby state. 1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first. Set the switch on the power supply to position [0].
  • Page 30 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use All necessary settings can be accessed from the Windows "Start" menu, in particular from the "Control Panel". To open the "Start" menu, press the Windows key in the tool- bar or on an external keyboard. User accounts and password protection The analyzer uses a user name and password as credentials for remote access.
  • Page 31 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use 3.1.10 Minimizing the VNA application ® With a minimized VNA application, you can access your analyzer's Windows desktop or run other applications. To exit the default full-screen mode of the VNA application, deselect System – [Display] ®...
  • Page 32 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use ● Instruments equipped with the latest controller board can also be remote controlled via USB. For the R&S ZNBT, external monitor and mouse are required for local operation. The R&S ZNB can be fully controlled by tapping the touchscreen and front panel keys. 3.1.11.1 Connecting a monitor A standard monitor can be connected to the DVI-D connector of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT.
  • Page 33 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use 3.1.11.2 Connecting a keyboard A keyboard can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After being auto-detected by the operating system, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even during measurements. Keyboard configuration The default input language is English –...
  • Page 34 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use A great variety of printer drivers is available on the analyzer. To obtain the complete list, select "Settings" > "Devices" > "Printers & scanners" from the Windows ® "Start" menu. Windows 7: select "Control Panel" > "Hardware and Sound" > "Devices and Printers" ®...
  • Page 35 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use 3.1.12 Remote operation in a LAN A LAN connection is used to integrate the analyzer into a home/company network. LAN connectivity offers several applications, e.g.: ● Transfer data between a controller and the analyzer, e.g. to run a remote control program.
  • Page 36 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network. 2. For the R&S ZNBT, connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse. 3. Press the Windows key in the System keypad (R&S ZNB only) or on an external keyboard to access Windows ®...
  • Page 37 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use 3.1.12.2 Using computer names In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru- ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address.
  • Page 38 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Preparing for use At the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, by default remote connections are enabled using a local group policy and remote access is granted to users instrument and administrator. For detailed information about Remote Desktop and the connection, refer to the Win- dows ®...
  • Page 39 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour ("System and Security > Windows Firewall" in Windows 7) ● Select "Allow an app or feature through Windows Defender Firewall" to enable "File and Printer Sharing". (Windows 7: select "Change Settings > Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall"...
  • Page 40 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour 3.2.1.1 Touchscreen The analyzer is equipped with a 12.1'' XGA color touchscreen. The touchscreen pres- ents all measurement results, mostly in the form of diagrams. Besides, all instrument functions can be accessed and operated by tapping the control elements on the touch- screen.
  • Page 41 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour ● The [MARKER] settings position markers on a trace, configure their properties and select the format of the numerical readout. Markers can also be used to locate spe- cific points on the trace, define the sweep range, and scale the diagram. The CHANNEL keys give access to the hardware-related (channel) settings.
  • Page 42 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour The keys in the DATA ENTRY keypad are used to enter numbers, units, and charac- ters. The data entry keys are only enabled while the cursor is placed on a data input field in a dialog or in the Help navigation pane. ●...
  • Page 43 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour The keys in the NAVIGATION keypad are used to navigate within the touchscreen and the help system, to access and control active elements. The "Cursor Up" and "Cursor Down" keys are used to: ●...
  • Page 44 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour The test ports serve as outputs for the RF stimulus signal and as inputs for the mea- sured RF signals from the DUT (response signals). ● With a single test port, it is possible to generate a stimulus signal and measure the response signal in reflection.
  • Page 45 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour Figure 3-3: Front view of R&S ZNBT40 (fully equipped with the maximum 24 ports) 3.2.2.1 Test ports Numbered test port connectors: ● Type N female connectors for the R&S ZNBT8. Depending on the equipped port options there are 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 or 24 test ports.
  • Page 46 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour ● both LEDs on: connector is used as a bidirectional (source and receive) port 3.2.2.2 Administrative area Mini display A miniature display is provided in the upper right-hand corner of the front panel to pro- vide the following instrument information: ●...
  • Page 47 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour 3.2.3 Rear panel R&S ZNB This section gives an overview of the rear panel controls and connectors of the net- work analyzer. 9 10 Figure 3-4: R&S ZNB rear view = 1st generation R&S ZNB (with latest CPU board LPW11) bottom = 2nd generation R&S ZNB (order nos.
  • Page 48 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour Table 3-2: Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description (Power Power on / off switch, see Chapter 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off", I/O) on page 28 RJ-45 connector to integrate the instrument to a Local Area Network, primarily for remote control purposes;...
  • Page 49 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour Table 3-3: Optional rear panel connectors Index Label Description Bias Tees This slot can be equipped with one of the following options: ● "Bias Tees", providing two or four additional BNC inputs labeled PORT BIAS 1 ...
  • Page 50 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument tour Figure 3-5: R&S ZNBT rear view Table 3-4: Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description (Power Power on/off switch, see Chapter 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off", I/O) on page 28 (Fuse Fuse holder, see Chapter 11.1, "Replacing...
  • Page 51 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Index Label Description REF OUT BNC output for the internal reference frequency of the R&S ZNBT. Use this connec- tor to synchronize other instruments to the analyzer. REF IN BNC input for an external reference frequency. Use this connector to synchronize the R&S ZNBT to another device.
  • Page 52 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument also Chapter 3.1.11, "Connecting external accessories", on page 31) or via Remote Desktop (see also Chapter 3.1.12, "Remote operation in a LAN", on page 35). Manual operation and remote control are described to their full extent in the GUI refer- ence Command reference...
  • Page 53 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Customizing the screen The contents of the screen and the size and position of many display and control ele- ments are not fixed. You can display or hide most elements. You can also drag and drop traces, info fields, and even the softtool panel to your preferred position;...
  • Page 54 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3. Select a control element, e.g. "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A control element with three dots (e.g. System – [Setup] > "Setup" > "System Con- fig...") opens a dialog, containing a group of related settings, a wizard or additional information.
  • Page 55 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 2. Select "S-Parameter" to open the "Meas" > "S-Params" softtool tab. 3. Select "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 56 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
  • Page 57 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3.3.2.1 Title bar By default, the analyzer GUI is shown in full screen mode, covering the whole screen and hiding the Windows taskbar. However, you can toggle the full screen mode using System –...
  • Page 58 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument These icons provide the following actions, from left to right: ● Print the current diagrams to a bitmap file (same as System – [File] > "Print" > "To File..."). By default, all diagrams are printed, no matter if displayed or not. However you can also choose to print only the active diagram (see System –...
  • Page 59 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Some controls on the softtool tabs allow you to read and modify settings (e.g. "Ref Value" in the screenshot above), some perform actions (e.g. "Auto Scale Trace"), while others open additional dialogs (button label ends with "..."). 3.3.2.4 Menu bar You can also access the analyzer functions via textual menus.
  • Page 60 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument ● A menu command with a right arrow expands a submenu with further related set- tings. Example: "Marker" expands a submenu with marker-related properties. ● A menu command with three dots appended calls up a dialog providing several related settings.
  • Page 61 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument The "Hard Key" panel is particularly useful if the analyzer is controlled from an external monitor or Remote Desktop. For the R&S ZNB, it is hidden by default, for the R&S ZNBT it is visible by default. You can display the "Hard Key"...
  • Page 62 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument ● the current date and time Figure 3-8: R&S ZNB/ZNBT with redefined physical ports Figure 3-9: R&S ZNB/ZNBT with switch matrix The progress bar shows a moving color gradient if the current sweep is too fast to be monitored, e.g.
  • Page 63 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Figure 3-11: Dragging Spreading and pinching two fingers Move two fingers apart on the display (spread) or move two fingers together on the dis- play (pinch). These gestures take effect for diagrams only. The effect depends on the current zoom mode (see Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams",...
  • Page 64 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Mouse vs. touch actions Any user interface elements that react to actions by a mouse pointer also react to fin- ger gestures on the screen, and vice versa. The following touch actions correspond to mouse actions: Table 3-6: Correlation of mouse and touch actions Mouse operation...
  • Page 65 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument All dialogs are operated in a similar way. ● To open a dialog, select a softtool button with three dots appearing in its label (e.g. "Start... (Manual)"). ● The title bar of each dialog contains some convenience functions: –...
  • Page 66 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3.3.5 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace.
  • Page 67 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select Trace –...
  • Page 68 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument The marker appears on the target diagram's active trace. The marker info field dis- plays the stimulus value (x-axis value) and response value (y-axis value) at the marker position. The response value varies as the analyzer continues performing sweeps.
  • Page 69 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument ● To hide the limit lines and disable the limit check, drag and drop the PASS / FAIL message onto the "Delete" icon. The limit line itself is not deleted; you can re-use it any time.
  • Page 70 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument ® is a standard procedure known from other Windows applications. However, there are various other ways to enter data. 3.3.6.1 Using front panel keys On a R&S ZNB you can use the keys in the data entry keypad to enter numbers, units, and characters.
  • Page 71 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3. To enter letters other than G, M or K, you can also use one of the methods descri- bed in the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.6.3, "Using the analyzer's on-screen keyboard", on page 71 ®...
  • Page 72 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.
  • Page 73 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3.3.7 Scaling diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 3.3.7.1 Using the graphical zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win- dow) to fill the entire diagram area.
  • Page 74 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument Use the "Zoom Reset" icon to restore the original diagram. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the "Zoom" label from the additional channel info line onto the toolbar but- ton. Alternative settings ●...
  • Page 75 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ● Use the [Start], [Stop], [Center], and [Span] function keys from the Stimulus sec- tion. ● Double-tap (with a mouse: double-click) the "Start" or "Stop" label in the channel list.
  • Page 76 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 3.3.7.5 Circular diagrams The radial scale of a circular diagram ("Polar", "Smith" or "Inverted Smith") can be changed with a single linear parameter, the "Ref Value". The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference. ●...
  • Page 77 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the instrument 2. Place "M1" to the start value of the desired sweep range and tap Trace – [Marker] > "Set by Marker" > "Start = Marker". 3. Place "M2" to the stop value of the desired sweep range and tap Trace – [Marker] >...
  • Page 78 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements 3.4 Performing measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNB/ZNBT network ana- lyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Prerequisite The instrument is set up, connected to the mains system, and started up as described Chapter 3.1, "Preparing for use", on page 23.
  • Page 79 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements 1. Connect the DUT between test ports 1 and 2 of the network analyzer as shown above. 2. Use the [Preset] key to restore a well-defined instrument state. The analyzer is now set to its default state. The default measured quantity is the transmission S-parameter S User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 80 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements Select Trace – [Trace Config] and use the control elements in the "Traces" softtool tab if you wish to create additional traces and diagrams. 3.4.1.2 Selecting the sweep range and other parameters After a system preset the display shows a diagram with a dB magnitude scale, and the S-parameter S is selected as a measured quantity.
  • Page 81 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements Tip: Refer to Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams", on page 73 to learn more about the different methods and tools for diagram scaling. 3.4.1.3 Calibrating the instrument Calibration (system error correction) is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results.
  • Page 82 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements Tip: For a R&S ZNBT with more than 4 ports, the graphical port representation is replaced by a generic port list. The selection logic is unchanged. 4. Select "Next" to proceed to the next page of the "Calibration Setting" wizard. 5.
  • Page 83 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements 7. The calibration dock widget indicates the standard measurements that make up a "Trans Norm" calibration. Select "Through (mm)" to initiate the measurement of the connected Through stan- dard. Measuring the isolation between ports 1 and 2 is optional. Skip it for now. The analyzer performs a calibration sweep for the measured quantity S .
  • Page 84 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements corner of the diagram. The marker info field displays the stimulus value (frequency) and response value (magnitude of the transmission coefficient converted to a dB value) at the marker position. 2. Select Trace – [Marker], activate the "Marker Search" softtool tab and activate "Min"...
  • Page 85 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN. Refer to Chapter 3.1.11, "Connecting external accessories", on page 31, and Chapter 3.1.12, "Remote operation in a LAN", on page 35 to obtain information about the necessary steps.
  • Page 86 ® Getting started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing measurements You can also use the basic transmission test setup, e.g. if you want to measure reflection and transmission parameters in parallel. ● The analyzer provides special calibration types for reflection measurements. Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type. A full n-port calibration (TOSM, UOSM, TNA ...) corrects the system errors for all transmission and reflection S-parameters.
  • Page 87 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts 4 Concepts and features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data.
  • Page 88 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts ● Cal pool data including system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via System – [Setup]. ●...
  • Page 89 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts 4.1.3.1 Trace settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...
  • Page 90 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts 4.1.3.3 Active and inactive traces and channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
  • Page 91 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved. It indica- ted in the status bar: All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization.
  • Page 92 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
  • Page 93 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts Ch1 Sweep End Ch2 Sweep End Ch3 Sweep End Ch1 HW Sweep Ch2 HW Sweep Ch3 HW Sweep … Ch1 Calc Ch2 Calc Ch3 Calc Ch1 Results Ch2 Results Ch3 Results Figure 4-1: Legacy sweep implementation (no pipelining) For each sweep, trace data processing is triggered when the first data of the last partial measurement arrives.
  • Page 94 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts 4.1.4.3 Parallel measurements on multiple DUTs The support for parallel measurements on multiple DUTs depends on the analyzer type: ● For a 2-port R&S ZNB or a 4-port R&S ZNB without internal second source (see Chapter 4.7.14, "Internal second source", on page 255) this feature is not available...
  • Page 95 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts from being driven in parallel. This could be achieved by changing the cabling of the DUT, but this is not always possible - for example if the same cabling should be used for different measurements and different kinds of DUTs.
  • Page 96 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts Parallel measurement with frequency offset is transparent to the user: All port groups will be measured in the requested frequency range. The results are available in the same form as if they were obtained in separate measurements without frequency off- set.
  • Page 97 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts stop power smaller than the start power is set, then the start power is adjusted automatically and vice versa. The power corresponds to the actual source power at the test ports (channel base power P ).
  • Page 98 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts sweep (implemented in hardware) has to be interrupted by the software regularly and cannot proceed autonomously after the initial phase lock. If the swept mode is selected and the R&S ZNB/ZNBT actually uses it (for at least one segment), this is indicated in the status bar: If on the other hand the swept mode is not used although it was selected, the underly- ing reason is displayed in an information popup:...
  • Page 99 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts RAW WAVE Channel data flow QUANTITIES for all traces of the channel SYSTEM ERROR CORRECTION (Factory) SYSTEM POWER POWER SYST. ERR. ERROR CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION DATA (User) * DATA (User) * S-parameters Wave quantities with wave de-/embedding...
  • Page 100 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts calibration on the measured wave quantities, intermediate results were transformed to the S-parameter domain. Before each de-/embedding step, the S-parameters were transformed to conductance (~ wave quantities), and vice versa afterwards. The new "wave de-/embedding" remains in the wave quantity (~conductance) domain and calculates all de-/embedding steps in one multiplication step, without unnecessary matrix inversions.
  • Page 101 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic concepts Channel data flow for all traces AVERAGE of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces SHIFT RESPONSE TIME DOMAIN...
  • Page 102 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements 4.2 Screen elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 4.3, "Measurement results", on page 125.
  • Page 103 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements 4.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select System – [Display] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 104 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace list: "MEM<no>" at the beginning of the trace name indicates a memory trace (with default naming), Math at the end of the trace label indicates a mathematical trace. You can also hide a trace ("Invisible") without deleting it.
  • Page 105 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements ● The respective section's context menu (except for the type section) provides access to the most common related tasks. ● If the size of the diagram is too small, some of the sections are hidden. Enlarge or maximize the diagram to display all sections.
  • Page 106 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements ● The reference marker ("R") defines the reference value for all delta markers. ● A delta marker ("DeltaM1, DeltaM2...") indicates the coordinates relative to the ref- erence marker. A special set of markers M1 to M4 is provided for bandfilter search mode. The most common tasks to be performed with markers can be achieved using the "Marker"...
  • Page 107 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements The info field contains the following information: ● "M1, M2..." denote the marker numbers. Markers are displayed with the same color as the associated trace. ● The marker coordinates are expressed in one of the marker formats selected via Trace –...
  • Page 108 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Frmt"), or formatted individually (Trace > [Marker] > "Marker Props" > "Marker For- mat"). The available marker formats are defined for all measured quantities and trace formats (see Chapter 4.2.3.3, "Measured quantities and trace formats", on page 124).
  • Page 109 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Marker Format Description Formula G + j B (Series) admittance: Unnormalized (series) conductance, susceptance, and either inductance or capacitance, in three ***) G + j B series or C lines (Inverted Smith diagram) Parallel admittance: G + j B parallel ***)
  • Page 110 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements While marker coupling is active, the marker sets of the related traces are always kept in sync, i.e.: ● If a marker is added to (removed from) one of the related traces, it is also added to (removed from) the other related traces.
  • Page 111 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements factor. For a meaningful definition of the bandwidth factor, the trace format must be "dB Mag". The info field contains the following search results: ● "Bandwidth" is the n-dB bandwidth of the bandpass/bandstop region, where n is a selectable bandwidth factor.
  • Page 112 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements 4.2.1.4 Channel list and channel settings The main properties of all channels assigned to the traces in the diagram are displayed in the channel list below the diagram. Each line in the channel list describes a single channel. The channel of the active trace is highlighted.
  • Page 113 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements via Stimulus hardkeys), the Channel – [Sweep] > "Sweep Params" softtool tab, and the Channel – [Pwr Bw Avg] softtool. 4.2.1.5 Context menus To provide access to the most common tasks and speed up the operation, the analyzer offers context menus (right-click menus) for the following display elements: ●...
  • Page 114 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Dialogs are controlled in the usual way. For an introduction, refer to Chapter 3.3.4, "Working with dialogs", on page 64. 4.2.2.1 Immediate vs. confirmed settings In some dialogs settings take effect immediately, so that the effect on the measurement is observable while the dialog is still open.
  • Page 115 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements 4.2.2.2 Common dialogs Open Dialog The "Open File" dialog is used to open various file types (cal kit data, limit lines, sweep segment lists, ...). Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces"...
  • Page 116 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces" in the above screenshot), and file types. Context-specific options (e.g. "Output Format" in the dialog above) are accessible via controls in the section below the "Ask Before Overwriting"...
  • Page 117 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements 4.2.3 Trace formats A trace format defines how a trace is represented in a diagram. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports the following trace formats: ● Cartesian trace formats "dB Mag", "Phase", "SWR", "Unwr Phase", "Lin Mag", "Log Mag", "Real", "Imag"...
  • Page 118 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Figure 4-5: S11 trace in dB Mag format: sweep type Lin Freq (top) and Log Freq (bottom) Conversion of complex to real quantities Among the measured quantities the R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports, only "Stability" factors, "Power Sensor"...
  • Page 119 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements In diagrams, the response values are always represented as points in the two-dimen- sional complex plane: ● The complex 0 is located at the center of the diagram. ● The real part is drawn in horizontal direction, the imaginary part in vertical direction. Result values for consecutive stimulus values are interconnected by straight lines, so the trace is represented as a polygonal chain in the complex plane.
  • Page 120 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Examples for definite magnitudes and phase angles: ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit (Z = infinity, I = 0) is one, its phase is zero. ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit (Z = 0, U = 0) is one, its phase is –180 deg.
  • Page 121 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements The basic properties of the Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero reactance (real impedance). The center of the diagram represents Z/Z = 1 which is the reference impedance of the system (zero reflection).
  • Page 122 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements ● The circles for the points of equal resistance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Z = infinity. The arcs for the points of equal reactance also belong to circles intersecting at Z = infinity (open circuit point (1, 0)), centered on a straight vertical line.
  • Page 123 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements Inverted Smith chart construction The inverted Smith chart is point-symmetric to the Smith chart: The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance (real admittance). The center of the diagram represents Y/Y = 1, where Y is the reference admittance of...
  • Page 124 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen elements From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com- plex admittance to the real and imaginary parts of Γ: According to the two equations above, the graphical representation in an inverted Smith chart has the following properties: ●...
  • Page 125 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results normalized impedance or admittance) if they are used for transmission S-parame- ters, ratios and other quantities. ● For complex "Impedances", "Admittances", "Z-parameters", and "Y-parameters" generally a Cartesian format or the polar format is suitable. ●...
  • Page 126 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S-parameters but does not necessa- rily show the complete signal flow. In fact, if the source and load ports are not ideally matched, part of the transmitted waves are reflected off the receiver ports. An addi- tional a contribution occurs in forward measurements, and an a contribution occurs in...
  • Page 127 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Table 4-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2 Reflected power at DUT port i=1,2 Reflection loss at DUT port i=1,2 10 log|S = 20 log|S...
  • Page 128 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Redefining physical ports can be used to insert external components (e.g. external sig- nal separating devices, power amplifiers etc.) into the signal path. This allows you to develop custom measurements, e.g. to test high-power devices and extend the dynamic range.
  • Page 129 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results ● Renormalization of the balanced port impedances affects all measured quantities that the analyzer provides for balanced ports. The default reference impedance of a physical port is equal to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port (50 Ω...
  • Page 130 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results   2. Power waves In the model of Kurokawa ("Power Waves and the Scattering Matrix"), the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows:       ...
  • Page 131 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Reflection impedance The converted impedance Z (1 ≤ i ≤n) describes the input impedance at port i of the DUT. Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement).
  • Page 132 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Table 4-5: Calculation of Converted Series Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Parallel transmission impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z (i ≠ j) can also describe a parallel impedance between the two ports. The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
  • Page 133 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results 4.3.3.2 Z-parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e. the complete nxn Z-matrix for an n port DUT). This means that Z-parameters can be used as an alternative to S-parameters (or Y- parameters) to characterize a linear n-port network completely.
  • Page 134 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results ● is the output impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with open input, I = 0). Z-parameters can be easily extended to describe circuits with more than two ports or several modes of propagation.
  • Page 135 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results ● is the reverse transfer admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, V = 0). ● is the output admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
  • Page 136 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results The notation for wave quantities is as follows: ● "a Src Port j" denotes the wave incoming at DUT port i, when DUT port j is stimula- ted. is detected at the reference receiver of the VNA port connected to DUT port i. ●...
  • Page 137 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Figure 4-8: More Wave Quantities dialog The following detectors are available: ● "Normal" selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point.
  • Page 138 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results 4.3.6 Unbalance-balance conversion Unbalance-balance conversion is the simulation of one or more unbalance-balance transformers (baluns) integrated in the measurement circuit. It converts the DUT ports from an unbalanced state into a balanced state and virtually separates the differential and common mode signals.
  • Page 139 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Example: 2 physical ports: Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Balanced port: Differential mode Log. Bal. port port Common mode 3 physical ports: Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Single-ended Balanced port: (unbalanced) port Differential mode...
  • Page 140 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results ● c: Common mode (for balanced ports) The notation of a general S-parameter is S , where <mout> and <min> <mout><min><out><in> denote the output and input port modes, <out> and <in> denote the output and input port numbers.
  • Page 141 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results 3. DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. 4. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices. 4.3.6.3 Imbalance and common mode rejection An ideal unbalance-balance transformer (balun) converts an unbalanced signal into a...
  • Page 142 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Logical port i Logical port j (single-ended) (balanced) Physical port c Single- Log. Balanced Physical port a ended port port port Physical port d – = –S and Imb = –S – CMRR and CMRR dsji...
  • Page 143 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement results Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter. They provide criteria for linear stability of two-ports such as amplifiers. A lin- ear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate.
  • Page 144 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces always the number of frequency points involved minus 1. If "Aperture Points" is an odd number, the part of the aperture towards lower frequencies contains one more fre- quency step than the part towards larger frequencies. If the group delay is constant over the considered frequency range (non-dispersive DUT, e.g.
  • Page 145 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Upper and lower limit lines are both defined as a combination of segments with a linear or logarithmic dependence between the measured quantity and the sweep variable (stimulus variable). Similar to this segmentation, ripple limits can be defined in several ranges.
  • Page 146 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Logarithmic interpolation The analyzer offers a logarithmic interpolation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps. While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized.
  • Page 147 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces 4.4.1.2 Rules for ripple test definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 148 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 145). 4.4.1.3 Circle limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi-...
  • Page 149 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit.
  • Page 150 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces 4.4.1.4 File format for limit lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...
  • Page 151 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 4.4.1.5 File format for ripple limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
  • Page 152 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces ● When exporting traces to a file, it is recommended to set the analyzer to single sweep mode (Channel – [Sweep] > "Sweep Control" > "All Channels on Hold"). This mode ensures that a complete sweep is exported. ●...
  • Page 153 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces # <frequency unit> <parameter> <data format> R <reference resistance> ● # indicates the beginning of the option line ● <frequency unit> can be either Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz. Default is GHz. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT always uses HZ for exported data.
  • Page 154 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces The first line is fixed, the second reflects the configurable identification string of the instrument. Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated. For "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" export format, it is represented as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM The other export formats "Version 1.1"...
  • Page 155 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces If balanced (and mixed mode) parameters are exported, the assigned logical port numbers are used: ! freq[Hz] re:Sdd11 im:Sdd22 re:Scd22 im:Scd22 re:Sdc22 im: Sdc22 re:Scc22 im:Scc22 ● "Version 1.1" and "Version 2.0" export formats These export formats always use single-ended identifiers Sij and port numbers 1 to n in the table header.
  • Page 156 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Keywords are new in Touchstone standard version 2.0. They are not allowed in version 1.1 files. The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way.
  • Page 157 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Network parameter data The network parameter data section contains one block of network parameters per fre- quency point. Each block is preceded by a frequency value, i.e. the first entry in the first (or only) data line of a data block is a frequency value.
  • Page 158 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces The "snp Free Config" export mode allows you to define ● the set of (physical) ports whose S-parameters shall be exported and ● the order in which they are exported The examples above represent the simple scenario with consecutive ports {1,...,n} and natural ordering.
  • Page 159 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Renormalization of S-parameters Renormalization means that the S-parameters at connector impedances are converted to S-parameters at certain target impedances. During Touchstone export, the S-parameters can be renormalized in two ways: ● Common target impedance The <reference resistance>...
  • Page 160 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces or dB Mag-Phase, respectively. The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog. ● <imTrace2>... second response value of second trace: im<Trace_Name> for output format Re/Im, ang<Trace_Name> for output formats lin. Mag-Phase or dB Mag- Phase.
  • Page 161 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on traces Multiple traces can be written to the same shared memory buffer. For each of these traces, the firmware stores a configurable number of formatted or unformatted trace values to a contiguous part of the shared memory. ●...
  • Page 162 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Use a shared memory buffer After you have created a named shared memory buffer, you can access it – from the instrument – using your favorite programming language and API. With Python, for instance, you can use the mmap module for this purpose.
  • Page 163 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Due to the analyzer's calibration wizard, calibration is a straightforward, menu-guided process. Moreover, it is possible to perform the entire calibration process automatically using a Calibration Unit (e.g. R&S ZN-Z5x or R&S ZN-Z15x). The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure are stored on the analyzer.
  • Page 164 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Table 4-7: Overview of calibration types Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection Normali- Open or Short for Port i Reflection tracking Low to medium Reflection measure- zation ments on any port. Transmission Nor- Through for port pair (i,j), i...

  • Page 165: Table Of Contents

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (equal at Reflection tracking, High Reflection and both ports), Match, transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through (between Directivity, cially in test fixtures. all port pairs) Load match, Transmission track-...

  • Page 166: Normalization (Reflection, Transmission)

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 4.5.1.1 Normalization (reflection, transmission) A normalization is the simplest calibration type since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each calibrated S-parameter: ● One-port (reflection) S-parameters (S , ...) are calibrated with an Open or a Short standard providing the reflection tracking error term.

  • Page 167: Tosm And Uosm Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration This calibration type requires a Short, an Open and a Match standard to be connected to a single test port plus a Through standard between this calibrated source port and the other load ports. The four standard measurements are used to derive the following error terms: ●...

  • Page 168: Removal

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration total number of standard measurements for an n-port TOSM calibration is 3n + n (n-1) = n (n+2). However, this number can be significantly decreased without losing too much precision (see Chapter 4.5.1.11, "Full n-Port calibration with reduced number of Through connections", on page 173)
  • Page 169 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Adapter Removal is an extension of the 2-port UOSM calibration. It requires two addi- tional reflection OSM calibrations with the adapter successively connected to port 1 and port 2. Figure 4-9: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients.

  • Page 170: Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● Adapter Removal is not defined for more than 2 ports. However, with "Multiple Cali- brations per Channel" enabled, multiple (disjoint) port pairs can be calibrated using Adapter Removal. ● Currently Adapter Removal is not supported with Automatic calibration.

  • Page 171: Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration TRL with several Lines and with TRM The system of equations that have to be solved for the error terms exhibits singularities whenever the length difference ΔL between the Through and the Line is an integer multiple of half of the wave length: ...
  • Page 172 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Example: TRL calibration with two and three Lines If several Lines with different lengths are measured, the analyzer automatically divides the calibrated range into segments. The calibration data of the longest line is applied to the lowest segment, the calibration data of the shortest line to the highest segment.

  • Page 173: Full N-Port Calibration With Reduced Number Of Through

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration E.g., for a line with l = 16.666 cm, the threshold frequency is 100 MHz. long At frequencies below this threshold frequency, TRL calculation is automatically replaced by calculation, if the necessary Match data have been acquired. Accuracy conditions for the Lines The length error of the Line, converted into a transmission phase error, must be below the minimum difference to the singularity points 0 deg or 180 deg multiplied by two.

  • Page 174: Complementary Isolation Measurement

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration If an external switch matrix is configured and you want to calibrate three or more test ports that are all on the same submatrix, then an extra Through measurement is required: Complement the minimum set of n-1 Throughs (as explained above) by an additional Through at a port pair that is connected by a "chain of throughs"...
  • Page 175 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration The standards are grouped into several types (Open, Through, Match,...) correspond- ing to the different input quantities for the analyzer's error models. The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties. The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit.
  • Page 176 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Offset parameters The offset parameters have the following physical meaning: ● The delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard. The electrical length is equal to the delay times the speed of light in the vacuum. It is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane.
  • Page 177 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Offset parameters and standard types Offset parameters are used to describe all types of standards except the Sliding Match and the Attenuation. ● The Sliding Match is a one-port standard with variable load parameters (sliding load) and unspecified length.
  • Page 178 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories; refer to the data sheet for the relevant ordering information. The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration kit model. Ideal parameters All ideal kits contain the standards listed below.
  • Page 179 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Figure 4-10: Sliding Match: GUI representation A calibration is valid (and can be applied to the calibrated channel) if either the Match or three positions of the Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards.
  • Page 180 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration By default cal kit files are stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration directory. ● To export cal kit data, the analyzer uses a specific binary file format *.calkit. ● Three different import file formats are supported: R&S ZVA-specific binary cal kit files (*.calkit), R&S ZVR-specific binary cal kit files (*.ck), cal kit files in Key- sight-specific ASCII formats (*.csv, *.prn).
  • Page 181 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 4.5.3 Calibration pool The calibration "Pool" is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the ana- lyzer stores in a common directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal.
  • Page 182 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
  • Page 183 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● RF connectors, which are connected to the test ports. For all Rohde & Schwarz calibration units except a customized R&S ZN-Z51, the connector types are equal for all ports. To connect the unit, 1.
  • Page 184 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration The assignment between the analyzer ports and the cal unit ports can be detected automatically. If auto-detection fails (e.g. because of a high attenuation in the signal path), you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select "Default Port Assignment".
  • Page 185 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Example: Select ports no. 1, 2, 3. A forward transmission normalization calibrates the S-parame- ters S , and S . A reverse transmission normalization calibrates the S-parame- ters S , and S . A bidirectional transmission normalization calibrates all six trans- mission S-parameters.
  • Page 186 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 4.5.5.4 Inline calibration Any disturbance of the measurement setup after the calibration process inevitably pro- duces errors. If a massive system error correction is required, e.g. if long RF cables with high damping are used, those disturbances can lead to inaccurate and unreprodu- cible measurement results.
  • Page 187 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Figure 4-12: ICC R&S ZN-Z30 For more information, see the R&S ZN-Z3x product pages at https://www.rohde- schwarz.com/product/NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3. Firmware integration The control connection between R&S ZNB/ZNBT and ICC is established via USB. After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC, it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC.
  • Page 188 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Because the ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. The VNA firmware supports: ● Pulling characterization data for the connected ICUs from the ICC ●...
  • Page 189 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Step 1: OSM g) Step 2: Unknown Through 5. Connect the DUT to the calibrated setup and perform the required measurements. 6. Refresh the calibration in situ, whenever required. a) "Repeat" the calibration b) Perform OSM measurements.
  • Page 190 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration port calibrated channel, only the two connected instrument ports are validated against the cal unit. The validation logic proceeds through the connected ports p ∈ {1, ..., 4} in ascending order, measuring S for the Open, Short and Match standard.
  • Page 191 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration For a channel with more calibrated ports than cal unit ports available, you can change the port assignments and rerun the automated validation. Or you can switch to advanced mode and validate each port manually. Advanced mode In advanced mode you can configure the validation settings (reference characteriza- tion, deviation limits) and run or rerun particular measurements (reflection at port p with...

  • Page 192: Connections

    ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Through connections", on page 173. Depending on the calibration type, a "minimal" valid and complete solution can be described as follows: Calibration Minimal solution Default solution (minimal) type Full One Port Each calibrated test port must appear in exactly one Subdivide the n test ports into port assignment.
  • Page 193 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Example: The following examples show minimal port assignments for a Full 9-Port calibration using a four-port calibration unit: Table 4-11: Full 9-port calibrations: star-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 1 Cal Unit Port 1 Cal Unit Port 1...
  • Page 194 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration of S-parameters S-parameters are not affected by a scalar power calibration. S-parameters are ratios of incident and outgoing waves: for linear DUTs, they do not depend on the absolute power. For measurements on non-linear DUTs, a SMARTerCal is recommended. A SMARTerCal is also appropriate for frequency conversion measurements.
  • Page 195 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 4.5.6.1 Source power calibration A source power calibration ensures accurate power levels of the generated waves at an arbitrary calibration plane in the measurement path. Typically the calibration plane corresponds to the input of the DUT. In a frequency sweep, the power at the calibration plane is maintained at a constant "Cal Power"...
  • Page 196 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Tip: Since version 3.0 of the analyzer firmware, it is also possible to perform the source (flatness) calibration using a power meter (without previously calibrating the reference receiver). 3. After the flatness calibration, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs an additional verifica- tion sweep to demonstrate the accuracy of the calibration.
  • Page 197 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration larger bandwidths are restored after the sweep. The analyzer measures the power at each sweep point, compares the result with the nominal power of the source, and com- piles a correction table. At the end of the calibration sweep, a checkmark symbol next to the calibrated source indicates the status of the measurement receiver calibration.
  • Page 198 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration A lower label in the list has priority over the higher labels (e.g. if the power calibration is interpolated and the source power is changed, then the label PCao is displayed). Interpolation and extrapolation The analyzer can interpolate and extrapolate power correction data so that a source or receiver power calibration can be reused after a change of the frequency sweep range: ●...
  • Page 199 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
  • Page 200 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration For an overview of measurements and recommended calibration methods refer to Table 4-13. 4.5.7.1 Calibration procedure A SMARTerCal is a fully menu-guided process which is performed like a regular sys- tem error correction. The calibration wizard defines the calibrated ports and the calibra- tion type;...
  • Page 201 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration obtain definite source power levels, you can combine the SMARTerCal with an addi- tional scalar source power calibration. The scalar source power calibration and the SMARTerCal can be performed in any order. As a result of the combined calibration, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT measures vector error-corrected S-parameters;...
  • Page 202 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding In this case, for each port to be calibrated the same calibration standards have to be connected. After connecting one of these standards, a calibration sweep has to be performed for each channel. This simple mode of parallel calibration is supported from the analyzer GUI ("Cali- brate all Channels"...
  • Page 203 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding The analyzer can also auto-determine length and loss parameters, assuming that the actual values should minimize the group delay and loss across a configurable fre- quency range. 4.6.1.1 Definition of offset parameters The delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the transmission line.
  • Page 204 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding In practice, the frequency-dependent part ist often dominant, so that Loss can be set to zero. Experimentally, the loss value at DC can be determined in a separate mea- surement at a very low frequency (f --> 0). 4.6.1.3 Auto Length The "Auto Length"...
  • Page 205 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Use Trace – [Marker] > "Set by Marker" > Zero Delay at Marker to set the delay at a special trace point to zero. Preconditions for Auto Length, effect on measured quantities and exceptions "Auto Length"...
  • Page 206 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding The effect of "Auto Length and Loss" on S-parameters, wave quantities and ratios is to eliminate a linear phase response and account for a loss as described above. Conver- ted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corresponding "Auto Length and Loss"...
  • Page 207 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● "Open and Short" causes the analyzer to calculate the correction data from two subsequent sweeps. The results are averaged to compensate for errors due to non-ideal terminations. Auto Length and Loss vs. Direct Compensation "Auto Length and Loss"...
  • Page 208 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding The offset parameters are also suited for length and delay measurements; see Chap- ter 4.6.1.3, "Auto Length", on page 204. In contrast to the embedding/deembedding functions (see Chapter 4.6.2, "Embedding and deembedding", on page 208) the parameters cannot compensate for a possible mismatch in the test setup.
  • Page 209 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● A combination of four-port and two-port networks can be applied to any pair of sin- gle-ended ports. Moreover it is possible to combine several port pairs in an arbi- trary order (port pair de-/embedding).
  • Page 210 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding output ports of the DUT. The matching circuit is taken into account numerically. The analyzer measures the DUT alone but provides the characteristics of the DUT, includ- ing the desired matching circuit. This method provides a number of advantages: ●...
  • Page 211 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding since the serial resistances are set to 0 Ω, the shunt resistances are set to 10 MΩ and the shunt inductances are set to 0 Siemens. The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported two-port Touch- stone file (*.s2p).
  • Page 212 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.2.4 Circuit models for 4-port networks The lumped element 4-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks: ● A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor. ●...
  • Page 213 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding The following networks are composed of two serial Cs or Ls (as seen from the analyzer test port), followed by a shunt C or L. They are named Serial Cs, Shunt L / Serial Ls, Shunt C / Serial Cs, Shunt C / Serial Ls, Shunt L.
  • Page 214 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding The two port pair (de-)embedding networks in the figure below are based on port pairs 1, 2 and 1, 3 with appropriate sets of 4-port S-parameters. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port de-/embedding.
  • Page 215 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 4-13: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several de-/embedding networks, port set deembed- ding is calculated after single-ended deembedding, and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding.
  • Page 216 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 4.6.2.5, "Port pair de-/embedding", on page 213.
  • Page 217 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only applied to the differential mode port (2-port). It can be specified via a Touchstone s2p file or by parametrizing a lumped "Shunt L, Shunt C"...
  • Page 218 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
  • Page 219 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 4-15: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
  • Page 220 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset parameters and de-/embedding Figure 4-17: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.
  • Page 221 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 2. Single ended deembedding 3. Balanced port deembedding 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single ended port embedding 4.7 Optional extensions and accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality.
  • Page 222 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.1 Additional test ports (R&S ZNBT only) Various Options The R&S ZNBT8 is available with a minimum of 4 test ports (order number 1318.7006.24) that are either equipped with standard or with Extended dynamic range reflectometers (option ZNBT8-B504).
  • Page 223 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Time domain transforms can be calculated in band pass or low pass mode. For the lat- ter, the analyzer offers the impulse and step response as two alternative transformation types. A wide selection of windows can be used to optimize the time domain response and suppress side lobes due to the finite sweep range.
  • Page 224 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories point at zero frequency (DC value). The time domain result is complex, with an undetermined phase depending on the delay of the signal. ● Low pass mode: The measurement results are continued towards f = 0 (DC value) and mirrored at the frequency origin so that the effective sweep range (and thus the response resolution) is more than doubled.
  • Page 225 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.2.3 Windows in the frequency domain The finite sweep range in a frequency domain measurement with the discontinuous transitions at the start and stop frequency broadens the impulses and causes side lobes (ringing) in the time domain response.
  • Page 226 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● Keep "Frequency Gap and Number of Points" means that the number of sweep points and their relative spacing is maintained. If the start frequency of the sweep is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased.
  • Page 227 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Finding the appropriate algorithm The three types of harmonic grids have different advantages and drawbacks. Note that for a bandpass transformation the grid parameters have the following effect: ● A wider sweep range (i.e. a larger bandwidth) increases the time domain resolu- tion.
  • Page 228 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Time-gated frequency domain trace The trace in the frequency domain depends on the state of the "Time Gate": ● If the gate is disabled, the frequency domain (FD) trace corresponds to the mea- sured sweep results before the time-domain transformation.
  • Page 229 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories EMC Test Site Validation EMC test sites for radiated emission measurements rely on free-space conditions to minimize the influence of reflections on the received signal. Practically, near free-space conditions are achieved by shielded enclosures fully lined with RF absorbing material. Site validation determines deviations from free-space conditions that must meet the acceptance criterion for making EMC compliance measurements in a FAR (= fully anechoic room).
  • Page 230 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories where r = S 21,reflected 21,direct Measurement Procedure for ANSI C63.25 See the Rohde & Schwarz Application Card "Fast validation of EMC Test Sites above 1 GHz with Time-domain S ", published on the Rohde &...
  • Page 231 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-18: Eye Diagram (NRZ modulated) The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep.
  • Page 232 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-19: Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing.
  • Page 233 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● Opening Factor This result is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye open- ing. Accordingly, it is equal to (("Eye Top" - σ ) - ("Eye Base" + σ )) / "Eye Amplitude"...
  • Page 234 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-21: Rise Time Measurement Skew Measurement The skew measurement allows you to compare the step responses calculated from dif- ferent traces measured on the same analyzer channel. The skew is calculated as the "delta time"...
  • Page 235 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.3 Distance-to-fault measurements Option R&S ZNB-K3 / R&S ZNBT-K3 With option K3 "Distance-to-Fault", the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can locate faults and disconti- nuities on cables and transmission lines. Faults produce peaks on the impulse response (in the time domain) that is calculated from the measured reflection S-parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation.
  • Page 236 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Adjust the frequency sweep to the length of the transmission line and the expected dis- tance to fault: ● The maximum distance that can be measured is proportional to the number of sweep points.
  • Page 237 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories IF, up = | f IF, down In this example, the transmission parameter S corresponds to the mixer's conversion gain. Before measuring, the port frequencies must be set appropriately. In the port configura- tion table (Channel –...
  • Page 238 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.4.1 Calibration options In arbitrary mode, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT automatically calibrates the source and receive frequency ranges of all ports, according to the frequency conversion settings in the "Port Settings" dialog or in dedicated configuration dialogs. ●...
  • Page 239 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Two-stage mixer measurements The scalar mixer measurement is also suited for measuring a system of two mixers with frequency multipliers at their RF and LO inputs. The RF and LO input frequencies of the first mixer are both multiplied by an integer fraction;...
  • Page 240 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories signals) or by an external generator. A test setup with two mixers involves two inde- pendent LO signals at both mixers. ● The IF signal is the mixer output signal (mixing product), which is at one of the fol- lowing conversion frequencies: IF = LO + RF or IF = |LO –...
  • Page 241 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories – IF signal (right side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 2), fixed frequency = (RF + LO) or |RF – LO|, expected power range. ● The following mixer signal diagram corresponds to a Time or CW mode sweep: –...
  • Page 242 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ples. These intermodulation products can be near the upper and lower tone frequen- cies, as long as their order is odd. The analyzer measures the intermodulation products of k order IMk (where k = 3, 5, 7, 9) at the lower tone frequency minus (k –...
  • Page 243 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone An external combiner is required anyway. Operation with more than one source is not supported, if External switch matrices part of the RF connection configuration. The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs.
  • Page 244 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone Intermodulation measurement results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results: ● In the swept measurement, the analyzer performs a frequency or power sweep of the two-tone stimulus signal and displays the selected intermodulation quantities as a function of the lower-tone frequency or power.
  • Page 245 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 246 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Intermodulation quantities A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal with the lower/upper frequen- cies f and f causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples: –...
  • Page 247 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.6 Frequency resolution 1 mHz Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K19 This software option improves the frequency resolution of a R&S ZNB/ZNBT to 1 mHz. 4.7.7 Measurement uncertainty analysis Option R&S ZNB-K50/R&S ZNB-K50P Measurement uncertainty analysis is available if option R&S ZNB-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.6 or higher) are installed on the instrument.
  • Page 248 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-23: S-parameter measurements with uncertainty bands Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) For R&S ZNB variants that support option R&S ZNB-K50, the VNA model is provi- ded by the analyzer firmware.
  • Page 249 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● Channel setup (IF bandwidth, power, ...) and calibration data Required to calculate the calibrated S-parameters and their uncertainties. If rele- vant settings are changed on the VNA, these changes are also propagated to the METAS VNA Tools.
  • Page 250 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.8 Eazy de-embedding based on IEEE 370 Option R&S ZNB-K210/R&S ZNBT-K210 EaZy deembedding (EZD) is an implementation of the IEEE algorithm for generating deembedding files from a symmetrical 2x thru measurement. Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 allows you to model a test fixture using the EZD fixture modeling tool and to deembed selected ports using the generated touchstone files.
  • Page 251 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-25: Fixture modeling: EZD – Balanced Ports dialog ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Chapter 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling and deembedding", on page 217. ● Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde&Schwarz service.
  • Page 252 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories The minimum required is at least two points for every 90 degree phase angle change in insertion loss (or 8 points per wavelength). 2. The "2x Thru’s" return loss must be smaller than its insertion loss. 3.
  • Page 253 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories The R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the Clear Signal Solutions AITT-DL implementation of the Delta-L v4.0 algorithms (see https://clearsig.com/clearsig/tools/#Delta). It allows you to perform: ● 1L (one line/length) analysis Typically used for high-volume manufacturing (relative comparison) ●...
  • Page 254 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Reference information for both protocols is available on the R&S ZNB/ZNBT at the address http://<instrument>/api/hums/v1/documents?name=<interface>. For <instrument>, enter the hostname or the IP address of your instrument, as for access to the GUI. For <interface>...
  • Page 255 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Option R&S ZNB-B1 for R&S ZNB4|8 Hardware option R&S ZNB-B1 provides: ● Bias tees for two-port R&S ZNB4|8, order no. 1316.1700.02 ● Bias tees for four-port R&S ZNB4|8, order no. 1316.1700.04 The optional bias tees have an impact on the start frequency of R&S ZNB4 and R&S ZNB8 network analyzers;...
  • Page 256 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.16 GPIB interface Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-B10 This hardware option provides a GPIB bus connector according to standard IEEE 488 / IEC 625 (GPIB). The GPIB bus interface can be used for controlling the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT from an external controller.
  • Page 257 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories plete, the handler will remove and replace the device and sort it into pass/fail bins. For details, refer to Chapter 12.3.4, "Handler I/O (universal interface)", on page 1544. 4.7.19 RFFE GPIO interface Internal: Option R&S ZN-B15 (1st generation R&S ZNB only) External: Option R&S ZN-Z15 The trend in mobile radio communication is towards higher scale of integration of exter-...
  • Page 258 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Mounting the internal unit (1st generation R&S ZNB only) The internal version R&S ZN-B15 of the RFFE-GPIO extension board uses the same slot as the bias tees (see Chapter 4.7.13, "Bias tees (R&S ZNB only)", on page 254).
  • Page 259 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Analyzer Option Minimum source power R&S ZNB4, 2 ports R&S ZNB4-B22 -85 dBm R&S ZNB4, 4 ports R&S ZNB4-B24 R&S ZNB8, 2 ports R&S ZNB8-B22 R&S ZNB8, 4 ports R&S ZNB8-B24 R&S ZNB20, 2 ports R&S ZNB20-B22 -60 dBm...
  • Page 260 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories noise floor of the receivers is shifted 10 dB down by reducing the attenuation in the frontends. The trace noise for transmission measurements is also improved. Hence, a R&S ZNB4|8 with Extended Dynamic Range option is well suited to test pas- sive devices with high dynamic range.
  • Page 261 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● Extended Dynamic Range options are not available for R&S ZNBT20|26|40. ● Extended Dynamic Range and Receiver step attenuators are mutually exclusive on the same 4-port block. ● Mixed equipping with Extended Dynamic Range and standard 4-port blocks (with or without receiver step attenuators) is possible.
  • Page 262 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.24 R&S ZNB40 reflector module with ESD limiters Option R&S ZNB40-B73/-U73 With the new reflectometer board (order no. 1317.8015.03), the reflectometers of a R&S ZNB40 are more robust against ESD events. If ordered with option R&S ZNB40-B73, a new R&S ZNB40 is equipped with the new reflector module.
  • Page 263 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories DC power measurement For the R&S ZNB/ZNBT an external power supply is required to measure P The DC power P supplied to the DUT can be measured using one or two of the four DC inputs DC INPUT 1...4 at the rear panel (option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-B81).
  • Page 264 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-26: PAE measurement types Measurement type / Input parameters / Circuit diagram Description Constant voltage source The DC power supply provides a constant voltage U ; a precision resistor R is connec- ted in series to the DUT.
  • Page 265 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.26 USB-to-IEC/IEEE adapter R&S ZVAB-B44 Hardware option R&S ZVAB-B44 (order no. 1302.5544.03) comprises an adapter and driver software for controlling external devices via IEEE 488 / IEC 625 (GPIB). The driver software is installed on the network analyzer.
  • Page 266 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection From VNA (e.g. USB) source port Power meter / sensor Power calibration plane External power meters must be configured with their connection type and device address before they are available as additional receivers (System – [Setup] > "External Devices"...
  • Page 267 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.28 External generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can serve different purposes. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port. External generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT.
  • Page 268 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator External generators must be configured in the System – [Setup] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, e.g.
  • Page 269 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the Ref In connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
  • Page 270 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ports can reduce or even eliminate the manual reconnections of the DUT, resulting in a higher measurement speed, reliability and repeatability. The firmware of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is able to control switch matrices from Rohde & Schwarz directly.
  • Page 271 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories For "real" 6-port analyzers (such as the R&S ZNBT8), a single sweep per driving port would be sufficient. Furthermore, each additional sweep requires at least one matrix switching procedure. This procedure involves command processing and physical switching and hence can take some time to complete.
  • Page 272 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Example: The 4x24 extension of switch matrix R&S ZN-Z84 consists of 2 separate 2x12 subma- trices. Matrix VNA ports of the "left" submatrix cannot be connected to the test ports of the "right"...
  • Page 273 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories ZV-Z82-16 Figure 4-30: ZV-Z82-16: limited connectivity 4.7.29.4 Multiple paths: precision vs. speed A switch matrix can offer multiple routes to a given matrix test port. Hence, measure- ments can be performed using different physical paths, where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes.
  • Page 274 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 4-31: ZV-Z81 Routes and priorities Example: For an R&S ZN-Z8x, each route traverses exactly one of the equipped 2x6 modules. The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module: 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes...
  • Page 275 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories For every supported switch matrix, the available routes are prioritized according to the number of switches they traverse (the rectangles in Figure 4-31). ● To obtain highest measurement precision, the driving port uses the "best possible" (highest priority) route.
  • Page 276 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories 2-port VNA Route 1 Route 2 ● 4 paths per transmission measurement for an N-port VNA with N≥4 4-port VNA Route Route Route Route This kind of "multipath calibration" offers the following additional benefit: During manual calibration, the measured reflection/transmission coefficients are pre- sented as memory traces –...
  • Page 277 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories The plug-in interface allows the external software to interact with the firmware before and after a change of the: ● channel ● drive port ● sweep segment ● sweep point The plug-in then can perform arbitrary actions and eventually return data to the VNA firmware: ●...
  • Page 278 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories For details, see the HTML help topics that are distributed with the plugin SDK. Interactions of the external DLL with analyzer firmware and external devices are synchronized with the measurement. Synchronization is done via callbacks from the FW, at so-called interrupts.
  • Page 279 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories The same software that runs on the instrument (firmware) is used to run the simulation. ● The R&S ZNA firmware simulates all available R&S ZNA models. It can be instal- led in parallel with an R&S ZNB or R&S ZND firmware, but only one of them can be run at a time.
  • Page 280 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories N columns N rows Figure 4-34: S-matrix replication By default, the firmware simulation applies InputBufferGroupSimulation.s4p to all channels in all setups. For each setup in the firmware simulation, you have three possibilities to define and refine the simulated DUT.
  • Page 281 ® Concepts and features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-35: Simulation noise ● Since version 3.40 of the analyzer firmware, simulation noise can be activated or deactivated from the analyzer GUI. ● Make sure to deactivate "Simulation Noise" before exporting traces to file (see Chapter 4.4.2, "Trace files", on page 151).
  • Page 282 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools 5 GUI reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened via the keys on the front panel of the analyzer, via the on-screen Hardkey panel...
  • Page 283 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools Table 5-1: Function keys and softtools (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action Trace – [Meas] Alt + Shift + A Meas softtool default Trace – [Format] Alt + Shift + B Format softtool default Trace –...
  • Page 284 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action System – [File Print] Ctrl + O File softtool default 2nd generation R&S ZNB models only (order nos. 1334.3330.xx) System – [File] Ctrl + O File softtool default other R&S ZNB and R&S ZNBT...
  • Page 285 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Port activation on demand If a requested result involves disabled ports, but could be calculated if those ports were configured as single-ended ports with "logical port number = physical port number", then the required logical port configuration is performed automatically. For example, with P1 assigned to L1 and P2 disabled, S21 could be measured if P2 would be assigned to L2.
  • Page 286 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool ● s (single-ended, unbalanced) It is also possible to display "raw" single-ended S-parameters within the same channel: after setting the S-Parameter type to "S" any pair of (used) physical ports can be selected. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed...
  • Page 287 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Note: If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 5.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measurement dialog", on page 570) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the rela- ted channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 549), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out).
  • Page 288 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Tip: The default reference impedance of the physical analyzer ports is Z = 50 Ω. The default reference impedances for balanced ports are derived hereof. You do not need to change this value unless you want to renormalize the port impedances; Chapter 4.3.2, "Reference impedances", on page 128.
  • Page 289 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Instrument reset To obtain a predictable result, the measurement wizard has to reset all settings except the current calibration data. Store your recall set if you do not want to lose the current configuration.
  • Page 290 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The port configurations are arranged in the list to the right. The resulting port assign- ment is shown on the left-hand side of the "Predefined Config" tab. ● For a single-ended port, the diagram shows a single line between the physical test port and the logical port.
  • Page 291 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool ● To define a balanced port, select two physical ports and tap "Balanced". ● To dissolve balanced ports, select them and tap "Single". ● To exclude logical ports from the measurement, select them and tap "Unused". ●...
  • Page 292 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Furthermore, provides functions for renumbering the logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Reference Impedance tab The "Reference Impedance" tab of the "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to define (or redefine) the impedances of the logical ports. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.3.2, "Reference...
  • Page 293 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances). By changing the refer- ence impedance, it is possible to convert the measured values at 50 Ω...
  • Page 294 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Renormalization According to Theory of Selects the waveguide circuit theory for renormalization. The conversion formulas of these theories only differ if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non- zero imaginary part.
  • Page 295 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The predefined wave quantities can all be obtained with the same test setup, where a 2-port DUT is connected between the analyzer ports 1 and 2. The stimulus signal is provided by the analyzer port 1 or 2 ("Source Port"). The predefined wave quantities correspond to the 2-port S-parameters: ●...
  • Page 296 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ● The source port for the stimulus signal must be specified in addition.
  • Page 297 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data. For details refer to Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Detector settings", on page 136.
  • Page 298 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool ● "a1 Source Port 1" is the wave transmitted at physical port 1. In a standard S- parameter measurement, this wave is fed to the input port (port 1) of the DUT (for- ward measurement).
  • Page 299 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...
  • Page 300 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Show as Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace. It is possible to display the measured "Voltage" V or to convert it into a power value P according to the formula P = V / Re(Z denotes the reference impedance of the source port (for wave quantities a ) or of...
  • Page 301 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool 5.2.4.1 Controls on the Intermod. tab The following buttons in the "Intermod." tab open associated dialogs: ● "More IM Products...": see Chapter 5.2.4.2, "IM Products dialog", on page 302 ● "More Intercept...": see Chapter 5.2.4.3, "Intercept Points dialog", on page 303...
  • Page 302 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool ● "Lower Tone at DUT In", "Lower Tone at DUT Out", "Upper Tone at DUT In", and "Upper Tone at DUT Out" are measurements of the two fundamental waves of the intermodulation measurement. ●...
  • Page 303 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool "Upper" The "Upper" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies above the upper tone. "Lower" The "Lower" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies below the lower tone. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Relative If "Relative" is selected, the intermodulation product is displayed in dB units relative to the measured lower tone level at the DUT output ("Lower Tone at DUT Out").
  • Page 304 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Side Defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones. "Major" Denotes the lower or upper intercept point, whichever is smaller. The "Major" intercept point reveals the worst-case performance of the DUT.
  • Page 305 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Z←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n impedance parameters. Converted impedance parameters are expressed as Z←S , where <out>...
  • Page 306 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", 'SHUNT-S12' | 'SHUNT-S13 | ... | 'SHUNT-S21' | 'SHUNT-S23' | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", 'SHUNT-S12' | 'SHUNT-S13 | ...
  • Page 307 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S12" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S22" | ... Y←S<out><in> softkeys Selects the 2-port converted admittance parameters. The parameters describe the admittances of a 2-port DUT, obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflec- tion measurements: ●...
  • Page 308 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool 5.2.7 Y-Z-Params tab Allows you to select Y- and Z-parameters as measured quantities. Both Y- and Z- parameters can serve as an alternative to S-parameters for characterizing a linear n- port network. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 309 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
  • Page 310 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The "Imbal. CMRR" measurements require at least two logical ports are available, at least one of them balanced. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.6, "Unbalance-balance conversion", on page 138 ●...
  • Page 311 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Imb21/Imb12 /CMRR21/CMRR12 Selects one of the standard 2-port imbalance or CMRR parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. The buttons are available if either logical port 1 or logical port 2 (or both) is defined as a balanced port. A yellow font color indicates that currently the other logical port number is undefined and the physical port with the same number is marked as unused.
  • Page 312 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Logical port i Logical ports j,k (balanced) (single-ended) Physical port a Physical port c Log. Balanced Balanced port port port Physical port b Physical port d Imbalance 1 / Imbalance 2 Imbalance 1 selects the balanced logical port i as the input, the single-ended logical ports j and k as the output and calculates the following imbalance parameter: = –(S –...
  • Page 313 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Stability Selects a stability factor as a measured quantity for the active trace. The stability factor calculation is based on 2-port reflection and transmission S-parameters so that the input and output port numbers must be different. The pull-down list contains all possi- ble physical (single-ended) port combinations.
  • Page 314 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Power Meter Shows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured. See "Configured Devices" on page 782. The bordered label below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter.
  • Page 315 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool 5.2.11.1 Controls on the DC tab The "PAE..." button opens the Power Added Efficiency dialog. DC 1/DC 2/DC 3/DC 4/Source Port Selects a DC INPUT and the drive port for the active trace. The DC voltages "DC 1", ..., "DC 4"...
  • Page 316 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.25.1, "Power added efficiency", on page 262. A PAE measurement involves the following steps: 1. Select the "Measurement Type", according to the properties of your DC power source.
  • Page 317 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PAE:TYPE Formula Shows the formula for the calculation of the DC supply power P , depending on the selected Measurement Type. The parameters R, U , and/or I must be entered in accordance with the properties with the DC power source and precision resistor in use.
  • Page 318 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool 5.2.12.1 Controls on the External DLL tab Configuration / Perm. Settings Opens the External DLL Configuration Dialog. Measurement The "Measurement" section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug-ins. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a measurement button "<ext_dll_name>"...
  • Page 319 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST? Active ← Loaded DLLs table Allows you to de-/activate the respective plugin in the current channel. An active plugin can be used to create traces and/or can be made Permanent. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL[:STATe] Permanent ←...
  • Page 320 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool The firmware must be run as administrator to add or remove custom plugins. Once installed, standard user privileges are sufficient to use a plugin's functionality. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:ADD [SENSe:]CDLL:REMove Configure Device Adress Opens an additional dialog that allows you to specify the addresses of external devices the external DLL requires to complete its tasks.
  • Page 321 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas softtool Access: External DLL tab > "Measurement" section buttons Figure 5-3: Trace Definition dialog In the VNA firmware, the following string represents the measured quantity: Cu(P<Src Port>)<lowercase_ext_dll_name>/<Task Type>/<Additional Input> This string is displayed in the trace info and in the "Trace Manager". You can also use it to specify the corresponding <Result>...
  • Page 322 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool 5.3 Format softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area. Access: Trace – [Format] Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 5.2, "Meas softtool",...
  • Page 323 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool Application: dB Mag is the default format for the complex, dimensionless S-parame- ters. The dB-scale is the natural scale for measurements related to power ratios (inser- tion loss, gain etc.). Tip (alternative formats): The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale.
  • Page 324 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
  • Page 325 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e. φ (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. φ (C) is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (refer- ence phase = 0°).
  • Page 326 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
  • Page 327 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.
  • Page 328 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool 5.4 Scale softtool The "Scale" softtool allows you to define how the active trace is displayed in its current format. Access: Trace – [Scale] hardkey 5.4.1 Scale Values tab Provides the functions for diagram scaling. The "Scale Values"...
  • Page 329 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool Alternatives to Scaling There are several alternatives to manual trace/diagram scaling. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams", on page 73 ● Chapter 5.8.1, "Stimulus tab", on page 414 Auto Scale Trace Adjusts the "Scale/Div"...
  • Page 330 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool symbol corresponds to the trace color. As the "Ref Value" is varied, the position of the reference line ("Ref Pos") is left unchanged, so that the current trace is shifted in vertical direction. The unit of the "Ref Value" depends on the display format: dB for display format "dB Mag", degrees for "Phase"...
  • Page 331 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
  • Page 332 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams", on page 73 ● Chapter 5.4.1, "Scale Values tab", on page 328 ● Chapter 5.8.1, "Stimulus tab", on page 414...
  • Page 333 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a graphical zoom has been applied to the current diagram, this action resets the zoom area. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Overview On If a graphical zoom has been applied to the active diagram (and has not been reset, this button toggles the overview for this diagram.
  • Page 334 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other; see Chapter 6.3.2, "Active traces in remote control", on page 818.
  • Page 335 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Add Tr+Diag Creates a trace in the active channel and assigns it to a new diagram. Otherwise behaves like Trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED Delete Trace Deletes the active trace and removes it from the diagram area. If the active diagram contains only one trace, the diagram is also deleted.
  • Page 336 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool ● "Disable all Disables all channels, except the active one ● other Measure- Disables all traces in the active channel, except the active one ● ments" Hides all diagrams except the active one "Enable all Restores the previous channel/trace/diagram configuration Measure-...
  • Page 337 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable (white) or non-editable (gray) columns. Table Area The table contains the following columns: ● "Name" indicates name of the related trace. Trace names must be unambiguous across all channels and diagram areas in a recall set.
  • Page 338 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool The default names for new traces are "Trc<n>", where <n> is selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unambiguous. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Delete Deletes the selected trace. This button is disabled if the recall set contains only one trace: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
  • Page 339 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...
  • Page 340 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Data to <Destination> Stores the current state of the active data trace to the Destination memory trace. No trace functions are applied to the stored trace. Tips: ● Data & Func to <Destination> to apply trace functions to the stored trace.
  • Page 341 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Show <Mem> Shows or hides the active memory trace or the first memory trace of the active data trace. If no memory trace is associated with the active data trace, "Show <Mem>" is disabled. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW 5.5.3 All Mem All Data tab...
  • Page 342 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Destination Selects the destination for the All Data to <Destination> All Data & Func to <Desti- nation> functions, that operate on all data traces in the active recall set. ●...
  • Page 343 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool 5.5.4.1 Controls on the Math tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
  • Page 344 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool "Trace Math" is enabled if the active data trace fulfills the conditions for evaluating the mathematical relation. E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can evaluate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>"...
  • Page 345 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces. They are calculated on a point-to-point basis. Each trace point no. i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c , ..., c plus the...
  • Page 346 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool The effect of the basic arithmetic operators (/, *, –, +) and the mathematical – functions is described in Table 5-2. Products of numbers and constants may be entered in abbreviated form, e.g. 2e for 2*e.
  • Page 347 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool ● In time sweeps, "StimVal" is the stimulus time in s. ● In CW mode sweeps, "StimVal" is the number of the point. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine Result is Wave Quantity "Result is Wave Quantity" controls the conversion and formatting of the mathematic expression.
  • Page 348 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:WUNit[:STATe] Recall... / Save... Recalls / saves a mathematical expression from / to a trace math string file. Trace math string files are ASCII files with the default extension *.mth and contain the mathemati- cal expression as it is written in the "User Def Math"...
  • Page 349 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq"...
  • Page 350 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Note: The frequency domain window is used to filter the trace before transforming it to the time domain. An independent "Time Gate" can be used after the transformation to eliminate unwanted responses (see Chapter 5.5.6, "Time Gate tab", on page 353).
  • Page 351 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool 5.5.5.2 Low Pass Settings dialog The "Low Pass Settings" dialog defines the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms. Access: Trace – [Trace Config] > "Time Domain" > "Low Pass Settings..." Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.2.4, "Harmonic...
  • Page 352 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool The three grids can be calculated repeatedly in any order; the analyzer always starts from the original set of sweep points. For more information, refer to Chapter 4.7.2.4, "Harmonic grid", on page 225. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs Automatic Harmonic Grid...
  • Page 353 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency 5.5.6 Time Gate tab Defines and activates a gate in the time domain. An active time gate acts on the trace in time domain and in frequency domain representation. In time domain representation, you can use the time gate settings to eliminate unwanted responses in your signal.
  • Page 354 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Axis Pair "Start Stop" lets you define the time gate via its "Start" and "Stop", "Center Span" lets you define it via its "Center" and "Span" value (in time). The analyzer generates a warning if the (resulting) time span exceeds the unambiguous range which is given by Δt = 1/Δf, where Δf is the "Freq Step Size".
  • Page 355 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool 5.5.7 Distance to Fault tab This tab is only visible, if option K3 is installed on the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. It replicates the "Distance to Fault" tab of the "Distance to Fault" application. See Chapter 5.16.4, "Dis- tance to Fault Application",...
  • Page 356 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n cor- responding response values y (measurement points). The statistical values are obtained as follows: ● "Min" and "Max" are the largest and the smallest of all response values y ●...
  • Page 357 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Phase/El Length Displays or hides the phase delay ("Phs Dly") and the electrical length ("El Len") of the trace in the selected evaluation range ("Evaluation Range..."). The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information, i.e. for the formats "Phase", "Unwr Phase", and the polar diagram formats "Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"...
  • Page 358 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Compr. Point / Compr. Val. Displays or hides all results related to the x dB (or x degrees) compression point of the trace, where x is the selected compression value. To obtain valid compression point results, a power sweep must be active, and the trace format must be dB or phase.
  • Page 359 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Reference Value This control is only available if compression point statistics are calculated. It selects the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. "First Point"...
  • Page 360 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW Defined Value This setting is only visible if "Defined Value" is used as Reference Value. It manually defines the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RPHase...
  • Page 361 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area. Range limit lines are two vertical lines at the Start and Stop values of the active evaluation range ("Range 1" to "Range 10").
  • Page 362 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Smoothing Activates the smoothing function for the active trace, which can be a data or a memory trace. With smoothing active, the trace value at each sweep point is replaced by the arith- metic mean of the trace values at the sweep point itself, and at neighboring sweep points (symmetrically, to the left and to the right).
  • Page 363 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing:APERture Hold Selects the "Max Hold" (peak hold) or "Min Hold" function for the active trace, or disa- bles both functions ("Hold Off"). With enabled "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" function, the displayed trace shows the maximum or minimum values that the analyzer acquired since the start of the measurement.
  • Page 364 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool ● The "Imag" value shifts an imaginary trace in vertical direction, leaving the real part unchanged. Tip: Shifting the trace by constant values is a simple case of trace mathematics. Use the "User Def Math" dialog to define more complicated mathematical operations (see Chapter 5.5.4.2, "User Def Math dialog", on page 344).
  • Page 365 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Infinite Average/Restart "Infinite Average" enables or disables "Infinite Averaging " (default: disabled), "Restart" starts a new averaging cycle. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage[:STATe] Mode Selects the quantities to be averaged. "Magnitude - Perform averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex Phase"...
  • Page 366 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool ● The buttons in the "Export snp Files" section call up a dialog to store data or mem- ory traces to a trace file of the corresponding content and file format; see Chap- ter 5.5.11.2, "Export Data - <File Type>...
  • Page 367 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool patibility means that the "Sweep Type" of the two traces must match; the position and number of the sweep points do not have to be the same. The analyzer checks for compatibility before importing data. The "Select Parameter" box remains empty if the selected file contains no compatible data.
  • Page 368 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Figure 5-4: Touchstone file export Figure 5-5: ASCII Trace files export The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
  • Page 369 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Contents For ASCII (*.csv) and Matlab (*.dat) export, you can include the active trace, all traces of the active channel (including memory traces), or all traces in all channels. For Touchstone file export, it is possible to export the traces of the active channel or of all channels.
  • Page 370 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool The allowed range is 1 (minimum precision) to 15 (maximum precision). "Reset Deci- mal Places" resets these numbers to their respective defaults, which is 15 in both cases. Note: In the current implementation of the Touchstone file export, only the "Version 1.1 (ZNx)"...
  • Page 371 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Save Stores the trace data, according to the selected options. Tip: Note the conditions described in "Conditions for Touchstone file export" on page 158. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:PORTs MMEMory:STORe:TRACe MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:CHANnel Comment Added to File Defines a comment to be added to the exported trace data file.
  • Page 372 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config softtool Access: Trace – [Trace Config] > "Trace Data" > "snp Free Config..." Touchstone files and file export Note the conditions described in "Conditions for Touchstone file export" on page 158. Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT checks the channel data for compatibility with the trace export conditions.
  • Page 373 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Save Settings in Recall Set The "Select Ports" dialog preserves the selected and assigned port numbers. By default (unchecked), these settings are global, i.e. they are identical for each recall set and are not affected by a [Preset]. However you can also choose to preserve specific settings for the current recall set (checked).
  • Page 374 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool 5.6.1.1 Controls on the Limit Test tab The "Define Limit Line..." button opens the "Define Limit Lines" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines dialog", on page 377). Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area.
  • Page 375 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Limit Check Enables/disables the limit check for the active trace. If enabled, an additional info field is displayed in the diagram, indicating the "PASS" or "FAIL" state. Limit violations are marked with squares, whose color is defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog ("Limit Fail Trace Color").
  • Page 376 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:ALL? CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA CALCulate:LIMit:POINts:LOWer? CALCulate:LIMit:POINts:UPPer? Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CLEar Global Check Activates or deactivates the global limit check including upper/lower limits and ripple limits. The global limit check is a composite limit check over all traces of the current recall set.
  • Page 377 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Application: Graduated quality check The two pass/fail signals can be used to distinguish three quality levels of a DUT. The test is performed on two identical traces Trc1 and Trc2 within the same channel. Trc1 is configured with a tighter, Trc2 with a looser set of limit lines.
  • Page 378 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Controls on the Define Limit Lines dialog The "Define Limit Lines" dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the limit lines. The buttons below the table extend or shorten the segment list. Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ●...
  • Page 379 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:INTerpol Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line.
  • Page 380 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool The active trace must be cartesian and the "Format" of the imported trace must be the same as the "Format" of the active trace. ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 5.5.11, "Trace Data tab",...
  • Page 381 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Both import dialogs contain the following file import settings: ● "Offsets" contains two input fields to define constant offset values for all imported segments. The "Response" offset shifts all segments in vertical direction, the "Stim- ulus"...
  • Page 382 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Ripple limits can be defined for cartesian trace formats only and are limited to the trace format they were configured for. If another format is selected, the ripple limit lines are hidden and the limit check is temporarily disabled. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.4.1, "Limit...
  • Page 383 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Ripple Check Switches the ripple limit check of the active trace on or off. When the limit check is switched on, a movable info field shows the pass/fail information and the measured rip- ple in each ripple limit range.
  • Page 384 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar Global Check "Global Check" on page 376. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 376. 5.6.2.2 Define Ripple Test dialog The "Define Ripple Test" dialog defines the ripple limits for the active trace on a range- by-range basis.
  • Page 385 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each range plus the following editable columns: ● "Range On/Off" enables or disables the ripple limit check in each range. Disabling the ripple limit check does not delete the range but hides the entry in the info field. ●...
  • Page 386 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle 5.6.3 Circle Test tab Defines circular limit lines for complex trace formats ("Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"), vis- ualizes them in the diagram and activates/deactivates the circle limit check. Most of the control elements in the "Circle Test" tab are disabled if the active trace has a cartesian format.
  • Page 387 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.17.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 743). You can choose between various options: ● Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines. ●...
  • Page 388 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool The appearance of the limit fail symbols is defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chapter 5.17.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 743). You can choose between various options: ●...
  • Page 389 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool Radius / Center X / Center Y Defines the limit circle by its radius and its center on the X-axis and Y-axis. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA Global Check "Global Check" on page 376. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass"...
  • Page 390 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines softtool left ("FAIL") = "Circle Test" enabled, but not limited to "Display Circle" right ("PASS") = "Circle Test" enabled, but limited to "Display Circle" Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar...
  • Page 391 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position. The response value appears in the numeric entry field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe 5.7 Marker softtool...
  • Page 392 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr <i> Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
  • Page 393 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete" icon. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF Delta Mode Enables/disables the "Delta Mode" for the active marker. At the same time, enables the Mkr.
  • Page 394 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m> in one trace. The Marker <m>...
  • Page 395 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt. In "Arbitrary" Marker Mode, if the transformation between trace format and marker for- mat requires a concrete stimulus value, some result values in the marker info field can be unavailable.
  • Page 396 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TYPE Marker Info Displays the marker coordinates above the marker symbol. Remote command: Ref Mkr -> Mkr Places the reference marker to the position of the active marker. "Ref. Mkr -> Mkr" is not active if the active marker is a reference marker.
  • Page 397 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 110. 5.7.3.1 Controls on the Marker Search tab Max / Min Sets the active marker to the absolute maximum or minimum in the search range, i.e. to the largest or smallest of all response values.
  • Page 398 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute NPEak CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute NPEak CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Peak Left / Peak Right Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum to the left or right of the current marker position, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 399 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:TRACking CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:SEARch:TRACking Marker Config... Opens the Marker Config dialog. 5.7.3.2 Search Range dialog The "Search Range" dialog confines the "Marker Search" and "Target Search" for the selected marker to a subrange of the sweep. The search range is a continuous interval of the sweep variable.
  • Page 400 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool The 10 search ranges are valid for the entire recall set. Each of them can be assigned to any marker in the recall set, irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to.
  • Page 401 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Access: ● Trace – [Marker] > "Marker Search" > "Marker Config..." ● Trace – [Marker] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config...
  • Page 402 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:EXCursion CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:EXCursion:STATe 5.7.4 Multiple Peak tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 110. 5.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak tab Max / Min...
  • Page 403 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Tracking Enables or disables tracking for "Multiple Peak" search. If enabled, a new multiple peak search is performed for each sweep (creating/deleting markers as needed). Define an Eval Range to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power inter- val.
  • Page 404 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for multiple peak searches and activates it. If "Active", only peaks with an excursion above the configured "Excursion" value are considered. By definition, the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ- ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity.
  • Page 405 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Target Format Selects the format that is used to specify the Target Value. The selected target format applies to the current marker only: each marker can have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
  • Page 406 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Search Mode Displays and sets the current marker search mode. Select one of the predefined max, min, peak, or target searches or select "Sweep Pro- gress"...
  • Page 407 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool The "Eval Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog that allows you to nar- row the "Bandfilter" search to a particular stimulus range. See Evaluation Range dia- log. Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks. ●...
  • Page 408 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool If "Bandpass Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandpass region. ● "M1" indicates the maximum of the peak ("Max"). ● "M2"...
  • Page 409 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool If "Bandstop Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandstop region. ● "M1" indicates the minimum of the peak ("Min"). ● "M2"...
  • Page 410 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool ● "Absolute Level:" The bandpass (bandstop) is the tallest (lowest) peak in the search range. To be valid, the peak must be above (below) -"Bandwidth". The Lower Band Edge and Upper Band Edge values are given by the frequencies where the trace is equal to -"Bandwidth".
  • Page 411 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker The following functions use the stimulus value of the active marker to define the sweep range. ● "Center = Marker" sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker, leaving the span unchanged.
  • Page 412 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker softtool A standard application of "Zero Delay at Marker" is correction of the constant delay caused by the interconnecting cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT (line stretch). Note: "Zero Delay at Marker" modifies the "Offset" parameters and therefore influen- ces the entire channel.
  • Page 413 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...
  • Page 414 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool ● While in Cartesian diagrams the x-axis represents the stimulus values, in polar and Smith diagrams this direct relation is lost. In any case, a marker can be used to dis- play the stimulus value of a given trace point. For "Time Domain"...
  • Page 415 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool For a Log Freq only "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" can be set. Note: For segmented frequency sweeps the start and stop frequencies and the num- ber of sweep points are defined per segment. See Chapter 5.10.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 431.
  • Page 416 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool 5.8.2.1 Controls on the Power tab left = R&S ZNB with Receiver step attenuators and 4 physical ports right = R&S ZNB/ZNBT with Receiver step attenuators and > 4 physical ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices If the number of test ports (on the VNA and connected switch matrices) is higher than 4, the "Step Attenuators"...
  • Page 417 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool Start Power / Stop Power Defines the sweep range for Power sweeps. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STARt SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STOP Step Attenuators Defines an attenuation factor for the received waves at each analyzer port. At least one receiver step attenuator must be installed to use this feature;...
  • Page 418 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus softtool 5.8.3 Time Domain X-Axis tab If the active trace is a time domain trace, these settings define its stimulus axis. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain X-Axis"...
  • Page 419 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN Distance Start / Distance Stop / Distance Center / Distance Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in distance representation (see " Time / Distance"...
  • Page 420 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg softtool 5.9.2 Bandwidth tab Sets the measurement bandwidth and the shape of the digital IF filter for the active channel. A system error correction (calibration) remains valid when the filter settings are changed.
  • Page 421 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg softtool Selectivity Selects the shape of the IF filter: ● Filters with "Normal" selectivity provide the shortest settling time (recommended for fast measurements). ● "Medium" selectivity filters have steeper edges but require longer settling times. ●...
  • Page 422 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Factor / On / Reset "Factor" defines the number of averaged traces, "On" enables or disables the sweep average, "Reset" starts a new average cycle. The average cycle is also restarted when averaging mode is changed.
  • Page 423 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool The available settings comprise the sweep type (with related parameters), the trigger conditions, and the periodicity of the measurement. Access: Channel – [Sweep] hardkey Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.1.4, "Sweep control", on page 90 ●...
  • Page 424 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Together with the sweep range defined in the Stimulus tab of the "Stimulus" softtool, this parameter defines the grid of sweep points. The step width between two consecu- tive sweep points is constant on a linear scale (sweep types "Lin Freq", "Time" and "CW Mode") or on a logarithmic scale (sweep types "Log Freq"...
  • Page 425 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● "Auto" minimizes the sweep time. The Meas Delay is set to 0 s. "Sweep Time" indi- cates the estimated sweep time, depending on the current measurement settings. The "Sweep Time" and "Meas Delay" values are maintained until changed explicitly if "Auto"...
  • Page 426 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool displays the corresponding error code and description (see [SENSe<Ch>: ]SWEep:GENeration:ANALog:CONDition?) ● It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Freq Sweep Mode" settings as for the actual measurement; otherwise the calibration is deactivated ("Cal Off"). Calibration Manager dialog provides concise information on possible mode mismatches.
  • Page 427 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 428 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Sweep segments can overlap. The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct fre- quency points before a segmented frequency sweep can be started. Instrument settings such as the internal generator power, the measurement (IF) band- width, and the frequency band of the local oscillator can be set independently for the individual segments.
  • Page 429 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab", on page 414).
  • Page 430 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab", on page 414). A single sweep extends over a specified period of time, defined via the "Stop Time"...
  • Page 431 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● In "Point based" mode, the x-axis shows all sweep points with equal spacings. Gaps between sweep segments are minimized; no diagram space is "wasted" on unused frequency ranges. Point-based mode is indicated in the channel line. The example below shows a segmented frequency sweep with two segments.
  • Page 432 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● Sweep segments are allowed to overlap. ● In contrast to standard frequency sweeps, the start and stop frequency in a sweep segment do not have to be different. So with a segmented sweep you can measure n points at frequency f (in segment 1), n...
  • Page 433 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list. The added segment covers a possible frequency gap between the preceding seg- ment and the upper frequency limit of the analyzer.
  • Page 434 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Import.../ Export... The buttons open standard dialogs to import/export sweep segment settings to/from an ASCII file (*.SegList). ● "Import..." replaces the current segment list by a sweep segment list loaded from a *.SegList file. ●...
  • Page 435 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.10.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 431 ● "Show Point List..." on page 433 Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ●...
  • Page 436 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 18, 19; see Chapter 12.3.1.1, "User Port", on page 1538). The output signals are 3.3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 16 independent analyzer states. For an application example, refer to the detailed remote control description (OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue]).
  • Page 437 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 5.10.3 Trigger tab Selects the source of the trigger signal and provides additional trigger settings. Trigger system of the analyzer The trigger system is used to synchronize the analyzer's actions with events that can be provided by an internal or external signal or user-generated ("Manual Trigger").
  • Page 438 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool The following buttons in the "Trigger" tab open related dialogs: ● "Trigger Manager...": Trigger Manager dialog FreeRun / External / Manual / Multiple Triggers These four buttons select the trigger source: ● In "FreeRun" mode, a new measurement is started immediately without waiting for a trigger event and without fixed time reference.
  • Page 439 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:SOURce MANual *TRG Sequence Selects the measurement cycle or sequence of actions to be triggered in "External" or "Manual" mode. ● "Sweep" means that each trigger event starts an entire sweep, according to the current sweep configuration.
  • Page 440 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff Signal Type Specifies the "External" trigger mode in detail. ● "Rising Edge"/"Falling Edge" means that the rising/falling slope of every external trigger pulse can trigger a single measurement sequence. ● "Active High"/"Active Low"...
  • Page 441 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ... /Source/ ... The table defines all settings related to "Multiple Triggers" (see Chapter 5.10.3, "Trig- tab", on page 437). For all measurement sequences the following trigger sources are available: ● "Free Run" means that a trigger signal is not required ●...
  • Page 442 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 5.10.4.1 Controls on the Sweep Control tab Continuous / Single Activate either continuous (default) or single sweep mode. ● In "Continuous" sweep mode, the analyzer measures the related channel (or chan- nels) continuously, repeating the current sweep over and over. ●...
  • Page 443 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Restart Sweep Stops the current measurement cycle and starts a new one. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, the effect of this command depends on the sweep modes of the active channel, and the restart behavior defined in the Restart Manager dialog:...
  • Page 444 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Sweep Controller Activates/deactivates the (resizable) "Sweep Info" dialog, which displays the current sweep stage. The "Sweep Info" dialog is particularly useful for long duration sweeps that are executed in single sweep mode: by observing the dialog, it is easy to realize when the sweep is done.
  • Page 445 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Sweep All Channels/Sweeps If you select "Sweep All Channels", Restart Sweep restarts the sweep in all channels of the active recall set. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, the number of sweeps in single sweep mode is channel-specific and can be defined in the table below the separator line.
  • Page 446 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 5.11.1 Start Cal tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is a fully guided process. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 447 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Start Auto Cal Performs a fully automatic system error calibration for the active channel, using the active calibration unit with its factory calibration and auto-detection of ports. If one port is active, an OSM calibration is performed. If two ports are active, an UOSM calibration is performed.
  • Page 448 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool ● "Active Channel" if you only want to calibrate the active channel ● "All Channels" if you want to calibrate all channels in the current recall set ● "Selected Channels" if you want to calibrate only certain channels 5.11.1.3 Calibration Unit wizard The "Calibration Unit"...
  • Page 449 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool ● A successful calibration supersedes the previous calibration, discarding all previ- ous system error correction data. To keep older correction data, you can transfer them to the calibration "Pool" using Calibration Manager dialog. ●...
  • Page 450 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-12: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (Inline Calibration System) Figure 5-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 451 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 452 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Query further cal unit properties: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
  • Page 453 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool These buttons are only shown if more than 4 ports are available. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. "Next" is unavailable (and a warning is displayed) if the following happens: ● The selected characterization data do not cover all the ports to be calibrated. ●...
  • Page 454 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-15: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections (>4 test ports and multiple port assign- ments) If multiple port assignments are required and "Use Reduced Number of Through" on page 754 is enabled, make sure that each port assignment contains the Common Port.
  • Page 455 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Default Port Assignment Restores the default port assignments. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt: DEFault Start Proceeds to Step 3: Cal Unit. If the configured port assignments are invalid, this action is disabled. Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "Cal Unit"...
  • Page 456 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool In the upper part of the "Cal Unit" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part visualizes the active port assignment and the measurement progress. Figure 5-16: Automatic calibration: inline calibration system Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a...
  • Page 457 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool If switch matrices are involved, a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S-parameter trace is shown (see Chap- ter 4.7.29.5, "Multiple paths and calibration", on page 275).
  • Page 458 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Prev/Next Navigates between the port assignments. Only available if multiple port assignments are required. Apply/Cancel Apply the calculated system error correction to the active channel (or to all channels in the active recall set, if all channels were calibrated).
  • Page 459 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool culates the system error correction data (error terms) from the measurement data and applies the result to the active channel. Background and related information ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 460 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Access: Calibration Unit wizard (MultiCal), Step 1: "Ports" > "Add..." / "Modify..." ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" (MultiCal) feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 461 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports.
  • Page 462 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Transmission normalization and "One Path Two Ports" calibration types require two- port (Through) characterization data for the cal unit. For current calibration units, how- ever, these two-port characterizations are typically not part of the factory characteriza- tion.
  • Page 463 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "Cal Unit" screen that guides the user through the correction data acquisition. Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard (see "Step 3: Cal Unit"...
  • Page 464 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available: Figure 5-21: Calibration Presetting: Ports and Type (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation.
  • Page 465 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 466 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.5.2, "Calibration standards and calibration kits", on page 174. Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ●...
  • Page 467 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-23: Calibration Setting: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) Connector / Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated. For symmetric (sexless) connector types (e.g. 7 mm / PC7), "Gender" is unavailable. If "Same Connector All Ports"...
  • Page 468 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:PORTs [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:GENDers Import Cal Kit... Opens the "Import Calibration Kit" dialog that allows you to import a cal kit file. For background information, see Chapter 4.5.2.4, "Cal kit Files", on page 179. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT Back...
  • Page 469 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-24: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the sweep dia- grams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 470 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-25: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 471 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool "Don't Show this Dialog Again" has the same effect as disabling "Show Cal Kit Label". A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed.
  • Page 472 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Note: Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault...
  • Page 473 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Adds a new system error correction. The "Add" button opens the Define Calibration dialog without pre-selected ports. Delete Deletes the selected calibration from the list of configured calibrations. Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the Define Calibration dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre-selected.
  • Page 474 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The layout of the dialog panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 5-26: Define Calibration dialog (manual, > 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ●...
  • Page 475 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: The port parameters in many calibration commands define the calibrated ports. Type/Source Selects the calibration type. The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved: ●...
  • Page 476 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool functionality is the same as described for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits" on page 465). Back Go back to Step 1: Ports and Type. Start Start Step 3: Calibration.
  • Page 477 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Screen elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
  • Page 478 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire]:VERification: RESult? Port Overview Shows all source ports together with the possible power calibrations. For each analyzer port P1 ... PN, a "Ref. Receiver", a "Meas. Receiver" and a "Source Flatness" calibration can be performed. ●...
  • Page 479 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:DATA:PORT<PhyPt> [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:PSTate? Power Cal dialog – Ref. Receiver In Ref. Receiver mode, the "Power Cal" dialog guides you through a reference receiver calibration. The selected source port is displayed with its cal power settings (see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Modify Cal Power dialog",...
  • Page 480 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Calibrate Only Port Frequency Frequency conversion measurements, by default the reference receivers are cali- brated for all resulting frequencies – even if they are currently not relevant for some ports. Using this switch, you can limit the calibrated frequencies to those frequencies that are required for the related port, which results in shorter calibration times.
  • Page 481 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool "Source Port" defines the type of measurement receiver calibration: ● If the source port is equal to the calibrated port, the measurement receiver is cali- brated by the wave that is reflected back by a connected Open or Short standard. Connect the Open or Short standard to the calibrated port;...
  • Page 482 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool left = "Ref. Receiver" Pwr Cal Method right = "Power Meter" Pwr Cal Method Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 483 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 3. "SMARTerCal": a) Acquire measurement data for all required standards for the selected system error calibration type. b) Apply the calculated error terms to the active channel. c) Acquire the power calibration data at the selected source port. d) Use the source power calibration data to correct the absolute receiver powers at all calibrated ports.
  • Page 484 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-27: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports Figure 5-28: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (Inline Calibration System) User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 485 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-29: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (> 4 Ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
  • Page 486 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Characterization "Characterization" on page 451. Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
  • Page 487 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. Figure 5-30: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 2: Connections (single) Figure 5-31: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 2: Connections Related information Refer to Chapter 4.5.5.6, "Multiple port assignments",...
  • Page 488 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assignments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibration stages. For user-modified assignments, it provides assistive information indicating insufficient, or redundant entries. The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port.
  • Page 489 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 2. Finally: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 490 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Use "Next"/"Prev" to navigate between the calibration substeps. Start Cal Sweep / Abort Sweep Starts the necessary calibration sweeps or aborts them. Note: The power calibration sweep is performed at the "Reference Receiver Cal Power"...
  • Page 491 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Apply Is enabled when sufficient data have been acquired for the calibrated ports and stand- ards and for the power meter. The button starts the calculation of the calibration data and closes the calibration wizard.
  • Page 492 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 2. "Connections": Define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration units. 3. "SMARTerCal": a) For each configured SMARTerCal and port assignment, acquire error correc- tion data for the required calibration standards (provided by the selected cali- bration unit).
  • Page 493 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Delete Deletes the selected calibration from the list of configured calibrations. Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the Define Calibration dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre-selected. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections.
  • Page 494 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-33: Define Calibration dialog (MultiCal, Inline Calibration System) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
  • Page 495 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Characterization "Characterization" on page 451. Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
  • Page 496 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-34: Multiple port assignments Similar functionality as for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connec- tions" on page 487): select the adequate calibration in the "Cal Type"/"Ports" table to display and edit the corresponding port assignments.
  • Page 497 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool a) Acquire error correction data for the required ports and port pairs, and the required standards. b) Acquire source power calibration data at the "Power Port". c) Finally, decide whether to apply the resulting calibration. Background and related information ●...
  • Page 498 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-35: SMARTerCal (Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 5-36: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type (>4 ports) User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
  • Page 499 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
  • Page 500 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Selects the connector type and gender for all ports and allows you to import a calibra- tion kit. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.5.2, "Calibration standards and calibration kits", on page 174.
  • Page 501 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-38: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits (>4 ports) The upper part of the panel shows the selected ports and the calibration type. The lower part gives access to the connector and cal kit settings. Connector / Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated.
  • Page 502 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports Assigns the same connector type or gender to all selected physical ports. For some multi-port calibration types, the port connector types must be equal, e.g. because they require a Through standard with known characteristics.
  • Page 503 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The upper part of the calibration screen presents ● calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter during stand- ards measurement, ● power trace diagrams during the power calibration sweep The lower part displays the calibrated port (pairs) with their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 504 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 505 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool ● If inactive, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT permanently refreshes all traces of all diagrams which can put a heavy load on the connected switch matrices (if any). Hence it is recommended (and default) to activate it, in particular if one of the matrices uses mechanical switches (that wear off apart from making noise).
  • Page 506 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Step 1: Ports and Type The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured SMARTerCals and allows you to: ● "Add" new SMARTerCals ● "Delete" or "Modify" existing SMARTerCals Source leveling If checked, the "SMARTerCal"...
  • Page 507 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-40: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal) The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 5-41: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal, >4 ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports.
  • Page 508 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: The port parameters in many calibration commands define ports to be calibrated. Type Selects the calibration type to be performed. For background information, see Chap- ter 4.5.7.2, "Calibration types", on page 200. SMARTerCal is based on a "One Path Two Ports"...
  • Page 509 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Start Start Step 3: Calibration. Step 3: Calibration Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port (pair) and calibration standard, plus power correction data from the power meter. Same functionality as for the single calibration version of the wizard (see "Step 3: Cali- bration"...
  • Page 510 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool ● "PASS": all measured reflection parameters are within the specified Validation Lim- its, compared to the selected reference characterization. ● "FAIL" otherwise. [In this case, the validation stops at the first failed reflection measurement.] Remote command: CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN Advanced Mode...
  • Page 511 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Defaults are ±0.2 dB for magnitude and ±2° for phase deviations. Remote command: CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:UPPer CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:LOWer CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:UPPer Preferences Allows you to configure the behavior of the validation diagrams and traces. Unchecking "Auto Scale" prevents the traces from scaling as the measurement and/or standard changes.
  • Page 512 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool ● "Characterize Cal Unit...": See Chapter 5.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit dialog", on page 519 5.11.2.1 Cal Connector Types dialog The "Cal Connector Types" dialog displays and modifies the list of available connector types. Cal connector types must be selected in accordance with the connectors of the measured DUT.
  • Page 513 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Char. Imp. The characteristic impedance or reference impedance ("Char. Imp.") Z for the connec- tors is a critical value that has an impact on various parameter conversions. Z enters into: ● The calculation of the S-parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector type, if they are derived from a circuit model (see "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog"...
  • Page 514 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Add / Delete Adds or deletes a user-defined connector type. The parameters of a user-defined con- nector type can be modified in the table. Note: Deleted/Missing Connector Types. ● Deleting a connector type also deletes all calibration or adapter kits assigned to it. ●...
  • Page 515 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits...
  • Page 516 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DMODe [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DELete Query connector types and calibration kits: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? Import Cal Kit... / Export Cal Kit... The buttons below the "Connector Type" list are used to store cal kit data to a file and to reload previously stored cal kit files.
  • Page 517 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool One port and two port standards are listed in two separate tables. Most of the buttons on the right side are available only if the "Kit Standards" dialog was opened for a user- defined calibration kit.
  • Page 518 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File... Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a Touchstone file containing the reflection or transmission S-parameters for the standard. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the imported S-parameters rather than the circuit model to characterize the standard, if ".s1p File"/".s2p File"...
  • Page 519 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The offset parameters depend on whether the circuit model is defined as "Keysight Model" (see Chapter 5.11.2.1, "Cal Connector Types dialog", on page 512): ● In a "Keysight Model", a calibration standard is characterized by its "Delay" (in s), its characteristic impedance "Z0"...
  • Page 520 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool A cal unit characterization can be performed in a frequency sweep. The "Characterize Cal Unit" dialog is unavailable while a "Power", "CW Mode", or "Time" sweep is active. The analyzer always uses a fixed source power of -10 dBm to acquire the characteri- zation data.
  • Page 521 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Characterization Data Displays all characterizations which are stored on the active cal unit. The "Factory" characterization is available for all calibration units; it ensures an accurate calibration for all standard applications. Characterizations stored on an SD card (inserted at the cal unit) are prefixed with "SD:".
  • Page 522 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Figure 5-42: Characterization of inline calibration units Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.
  • Page 523 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Take OSM / Take All OSM and Through "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZNB/ZNBT acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data.
  • Page 524 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool File name / Comment (Optional) Selects a filename to reference the characterization data set in the "Characterize Cal Unit" and "Calibration Unit" dialogs and a comment, to be written into the characteriza- tion file. A filename is required before you can "Finish" the characterization wizard and store the data.
  • Page 525 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 5.11.3.1 Controls on the Pwr Cal Settings tab Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Cal Power...": see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Modify Cal Power dialog", on page 527 ● "Transm. Coefficients...": see Chapter 5.11.3.3, "Power Meter Transmission Coeffi- cients dialog",...
  • Page 526 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage:NTOLerance Flatness Cal – Convergence Modifies the amount of power correction for each of the flatness calibration sweeps. The power correction in each sweep, as controlled by the calibrated reference receiver (a-wave receiver), is multiplied by the selected convergence factor.
  • Page 527 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the selected power meter. The power meter must be disconnected from the RF power; see Chapter 4.7.27.1, "Zeroing", on page 266. A message indicates that zeroing is finished. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:AZERo 5.11.3.2...
  • Page 528 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer. Each port is displayed with the current "Power Result" at the input of the DUT (in dBm) and offset (i.e. the "Cal Power Offet"...
  • Page 529 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool In this first sweep, the power meter reading is used to calibrate the reference receiver of the calibrated port. The following calibration sweeps are based solely on the refer- ence receiver (see "Calibration procedure" on page 196).
  • Page 530 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Controls in the Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog Two Port Config... These buttons open the "Two Port Configuration" dialog that allows you to define the transmission coefficients of additional two-port devices between VNA and DUT (during the measurement), and between VNA and power meter (during power calibration).
  • Page 531 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool If no transmission coefficient is defined at all, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT assumes a 0 dB attenuation across the entire frequency range. This assumption is equivalent to an ideal through connection or selecting "No Coefficients" in the Power Meter Transmis- sion Coefficients dialog.
  • Page 532 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 5.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal tab User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel. "User Cal Active" is available only if a valid system error correction is available for the active channel;...
  • Page 533 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Scalar Power Cal – All Power Cals On / All Power Cals Off Activates or deactivates all scalar power calibrations in the active channel. "All Power Cals On" is only available if a valid power calibration is available for the active channel, but not active;...
  • Page 534 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out. If external generators are configured, they appear as additional source ports G1 ...
  • Page 535 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
  • Page 536 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...
  • Page 537 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Ch<n> Calibration Properties/Cal Group <n> Properties Displays the basic channel settings and the properties of the system error correction and the power correction for the channel (calibration group) selected in the "Channel State" ("Pool") table. "Ch<n>...
  • Page 538 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 5.11.5 METAS Cal tab The controls on the "METAS Cal" tab allow you to set up the instrument for real-time measurement uncertainty analysis. It is only visible if option R&S ZNB-K50 "Measure- ment Uncertainty Analysis" and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.3 or higher) are instal- led on the instrument.
  • Page 539 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool METAS calibration using calibration units is not supported. Start Verification While a METAS calibration is active, this button opens the METAS Verification dialog. Save Measurement Allows you to save the current measurement results to the temporary METAS VNA Tools project that is created under the hood during the METAS calibration.
  • Page 540 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The exported ZIP file also contains the characterizations of the standards that were used for calibration and verification. The characterization data are kept as static resources in the METAS VNA Tools database. In summary, the exported ZIP file includes everything that is required to perform an offline analysis using any METAS VNA Tools installation, not only the one on the VNA.
  • Page 541 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 542 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The cable models are read from the METAS VNA Tools database. Additional cable models can be added on a project-specific basis. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:METas:CABLe:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:METas:CABLe:TYPE Cal Kit/Uncertainty Allows you to specify the cal kits to be used for the selected ports. For meaningful uncertainty calculations, use a cal kit that is characterized with uncertainties.
  • Page 543 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Imported cal kits with uncertainties are preserved and added to the Cal Kit selection combo-box. There and in the Calibration Kits dialog, they appear with an "Uncertainty" flag. Start Proceeds to Step 3: Calibration.
  • Page 544 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool Verification Kit Allows you to specify the verification kits to be used for the related ports. Verification standards are characterized individually, including uncertainties. So initially no verification kits are defined. Use Import Verification Kit... to import your verification kit.
  • Page 545 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool The name of a characterization file inside the zip container must indicate ● the standard type (offset short, mismatch, 20 dB Att, 40/50 dB Att, airline, mis- match airline, att, attenuator, stepped thru) ●...
  • Page 546 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal softtool 5.11.5.4 METAS Reconnection dialog While a METAS calibration is active, you can notify the METAS VNA Tools about addi- tional reconnections and/or cable movements. The latter is only applicable if cables were configured during the setup of the METAS calibration. Access: main toolbar icon or Channel –...
  • Page 547 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12 Channel Config softtool The "Channel Config" functions select, create and delete channels, configure the source and receive ports of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, and optimize the measurement proc- ess. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] hardkey 5.12.1 Channels tab Allows you to create and delete channels, to modify the channel state, and to select a channel as the active channel.
  • Page 548 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Active Channel Selects an arbitrary channel of the active recall set as the active channel. This function is disabled if the current recall set contains only one channel. If one or several traces are assigned to the selected channel, one of these traces becomes the active trace.
  • Page 549 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool New Channel + Diagram Creates a channel and a trace with default settings, and assigns the created trace to a new diagram area. The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one.
  • Page 550 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.2 Channel Manager dialog The "Channel Manager" dialog allows you to rename channels and to change their measurement state and sweep mode. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Channels" > "Channel Manager..." Background information Refer to Chapter 4.1.3.3, "Active and inactive traces and...
  • Page 551 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.3 RFFE Config dialog for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 03 Controls the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports provided by variant 03 of the internal/external RFFE GPIO extension board R&S ZN- B15/-Z15.
  • Page 552 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Sweep Sequencer tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Chapter 5.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 558. GPIOs tab The "GPIOs" tab is split into two parts: ● The left part of the table area (up to column "Output Voltage") allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages (see "Basic GPIO configuration"...
  • Page 553 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.4 RFFE interface configuration Access: RFFE tab of the "RFFE Config" dialog Basic RFFE interface settings and command execution The RFFE config table gives access to the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces RFFE1 and RFFE2.
  • Page 554 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool In this dialog, enter the following parameters (according to the device to be controlled): ● "SA": a slave address between 0 and 15 as 1 hex digit ● "CMD": a command number between 0 and 255 as 2 hex digits ●...
  • Page 555 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
  • Page 556 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Start Meas Starts the voltage and current measurement. Note that "Start Meas" does not automatically activate the "Output Voltage" and "Range" / "Shunt" settings of the current channel. Use to activate them manually. The measurement (=sampling) time can only be set via remote command.
  • Page 557 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 02 / Var. 03. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage[:DEFault] Apply Use the "Apply" button to activate the configured voltage (and Range / Shunt) settings to the GPIO pins.
  • Page 558 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Range / Shunt "Range" defines an upper bound of the current to be measured on the respective GPIO pin. The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance. Possible ranges for ports 1 to 8 are { 2·10 μA | n=1,...,5 }.
  • Page 559 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● Make sure that the required RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports are enabled by setting the respective "Seq." flags in the "RFFE Config" dialog (see "Basic RFFE interface settings and command execution" on page 553 and Basic GPIO configu- ration).
  • Page 560 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings[:STATe] Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA Segmented sweeps: CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<Nr>:RFFE<Bus>:COMMand:DATA GPIO columns (sweep sequencer table) The cells in the "GPIO" columns define the sequence of voltages to be applied to the respective GPIO ports. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Unsegmented sweeps...
  • Page 561 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.2.1 Controls on the Port Config tab If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 5.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measure- ment dialog", on page 570) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related chan- nel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 562 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Note: If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 5.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measurement dialog", on page 570) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the rela- ted channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 549), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out).
  • Page 563 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool If any of the port frequencies are changed from their preset values, the frequency con- version mode is activated on pressing "Apply" or "OK" in the dialog. An "Arb" label appears in the channel line. "Reset" plus "Apply" or "OK" deactivates the arbitrary mode.
  • Page 564 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Permanent signal sources can eliminate the power settling times of the DUT but can introduce measurement inaccuracies, e.g. due to crosstalk between ports. Therefore, during system error corrections permanent signal sources must be deactivated. Note: ●...
  • Page 565 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Modify Frequency Conversion dialog The "Modify Frequency Conversion" dialog defines a port-specific frequency formula (for frequency sweeps) or CW frequency (for power, time and CW Mode sweeps). Access: Port Settings dialog > "Arb Frequency" tab > "Freq. Conversion" cells Dependencies The analyzer firmware enforces the following rules: ●...
  • Page 566 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● User-defined formulas are updated automatically: if a user defined formula is selected and the "Frequency Conversion Formula" on page 566 is modified, then the formula itself is modified. As a consequence, all "Freq. Conversion" definitions using this formula are modified as well.
  • Page 567 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Non-editable table columns In addition to the test ports ("Port"), the source ports include all configured external generators ("Gen"). Each port is displayed with its port number and device type ("Info"). For each port, the available power range and resulting port power are calculated from the configured power conversion and source attenuation settings.
  • Page 568 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool The control elements in the "Modify Cal Power" dialog are described in the following sections: ● "Channel Base Power" on page 528 ● "Port Power Offset" on page 528 ● "Cal Power Offset" on page 528 Receiver Level tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings.
  • Page 569 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Common controls Reset Resets the "Freq. Conversion" and "Power Conversion" settings of all ports. After "Reset", an "Apply" or "OK" terminates the arbitrary mode. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion FUNDamental Edit Stimulus For non-segmented sweeps, the "Edit Stimulus..." button opens the Stimulus dialog that allows you to access the stimulus settings without having to leave the "Port Set- tings"...
  • Page 570 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Figure 5-46: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
  • Page 571 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Port Config" > "Multiple DUTs..." Related information Chapter 4.1.4.3, "Parallel measurements on multiple DUTs", on page 94. For the R&S ZNB, the "Parallel Measurement" is automatically configured when "Enabled"...
  • Page 572 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Figure 5-48: Define Parallel Measurement (R&S ZNBT with 24 ports) ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten. ●...
  • Page 573 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 2. Use "Set" to prepare the DUT configuration. Modify the DUT/connection configuration according to your needs (see procedures below). Add/delete DUTs manually (R&S ZNBT only) 1. Use the "Add" button to introduce a new DUT. This action is active if and only if there are unconnected VNA ports.
  • Page 574 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool a) In the DUT perspective, toggle select the DUT port you want to connect or reconnect. b) In the "DUT Definition" tab, toggle select the VNA port you want to connect to the selected DUT port.
  • Page 575 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool In order to modify the balanced port configuration, proceed as follows: 1. Select the related row in the DUT table. The DUT perspective (upper left part of the dialog) now displays the selected DUT. 2.
  • Page 576 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Frequency Offset" settings as for the actual measurement; otherwise the calibration is deactivated ("Cal Off"). If there is a mismatch, the Calibration Manager dialog provides additional information.
  • Page 577 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool The generated error code can be retrieved via remote control command SOURce<Ch>:GROup:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:CONDition?. The configuration problems listed above are indicated as error codes -8 "invalid offset or frequency spac- ing" and -6 "no simultaneous mode possible". Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:CONDition 5.12.3 Mode tab...
  • Page 578 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool This mode is usually faster than "Chopped" mode. ● In "Block Alternated" mode, you can split the sweep range into several blocks of sweep points. The measurement then proceeds block per block, using the "Alterna- ted"...
  • Page 579 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Consider the following test setup with a strongly reflecting DUT (e.g. a bandpass in its stop band) that is measured in transmission. The incident wave a is generated at a frequency RF. The reflected wave b falls into the receiver mixer of the analyzer port 1;...
  • Page 580 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:LOSuppress[:STATe] AGC Mode Configures the gain control (GC) logic. In "Auto" mode, the analyzer adapts its receiver step attenuator settings to the RF input level (→ Automatic or Adaptive Gain Control, AGC). The A/D converter is always operated at optimum input level, selecting one of the following gain settings for every measurement point: ●...
  • Page 581 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● Without the Extended power range option only the AGC of the measurement receivers (the b-waves) can be statically set to "Low Dist" or "Low Noise"; the refer- ence receiver AGC mode is always set to "Auto" (see "AGC Mode"...
  • Page 582 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool During this measurement, the VNA firmware observes the "Low Dist" (LD) vs. "Low Noise" (LN) gain decisions of the AGC. It then determines the statically assigned gain for the individual sweep segments / drive ports / receivers in the following way: ●...
  • Page 583 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool The buttons on the "Intermod" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Intermod Wizard...": See Chapter 5.12.4.2, "Intermodulation Presetting wizard", on page 584 ● "Define Intermod...": See Chapter 5.12.4.3, "Define Intermodulation Distortion Measurement dialog", on page 588 ●...
  • Page 584 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● Max. IM Order: 9. From left to right, the peaks correspond to the following intermodulation products: – lower IM9 – lower IM7 – lower IM5 (marker M6) – lower IM3 (marker M5) –...
  • Page 585 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Intermod" > "Intermod Wizard..." The wizard proceeds in 4 steps: 1. Configure intermodulation measurement. Refer to Chapter 5.12.4, "Intermod. tab", on page 582. 2. Define the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. Refer to Chap- ter 5.12.4.4, "Frequencies and Power dialog",...
  • Page 586 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 3. Select the measurement results. Refer to Chapter 5.2.4, "Intermod. tab", on page 300. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 587 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 4. Finish the wizard with or without power calibration. Refer to Chapter 5.12.4.5, "Intermod. Pwr. Cal wizard", on page 592. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 588 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.3 Define Intermodulation Distortion Measurement dialog The dialog configures the intermodulation measurement (except for power and fre- quency settings). The "OK" button is available when a valid configuration has been defined. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Intermod" > "Define Intermod..." Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources (see Chapter 4.7.14, "Internal second...
  • Page 589 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Lower Tone Selects an analyzer port as a source of the lower tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:LTONe Upper Tone Selects an analyzer port or external generator as a source of the upper tone signal. The source must be different from the lower tone source, i.e.
  • Page 590 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:IMODulation:PORT Power Power of the lower and of the upper tone. Both powers are always kept equal. For power sweeps, the start and stop power must be set in the Frequencies and Power dialog.
  • Page 591 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.4 Frequencies and Power dialog The "Frequencies and Power" dialog defines the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. The frequency of the upper tone is equal to the lower tone fre- quency plus the "Tone Distance"...
  • Page 592 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.4.5 Intermod. Pwr. Cal wizard The "Intermod. Pwr. Cal" wizard guides you through the power calibration for the inter- modulation measurement. A power calibration ensures: ● accurate levels at the input of the DUT (source power calibration for the lower and upper tone) ●...
  • Page 593 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool ● Source power calibration for the upper tone signal. The setup of step 1 is main- tained. During the upper tone source power calibration, the lower tone is switched off. For frequency conversion measurements, no new source power calibration at the receiver frequency is performed.
  • Page 594 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool The progress of the calibration is monitored in the calibration sweep diagram, in close analogy to an ordinary power sweep; see "Calibration Sweep Diagram" on page 477. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:LTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:IMODulation:UTONe[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:IMODulation:ACQuire Apply After all calibration steps have finished successfully, "Apply"...
  • Page 595 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.7.4.2, "Scalar mixer measurements", on page 238 ● "Two-stage mixer measurements" on page 239 5.12.6.1 Controls on the Mixer Mode tab Most of the "Mixer Mode" buttons are only enabled if the mixer measurement is set up properly.
  • Page 596 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Mixer Mode" > "Mixer Meas Wizard..." The setup of the mixer measurement proceeds in 4 steps: 1. Define the mixer. Chapter 5.12.6.3, "(Mixer) Setup dialog", on page 598. 2.
  • Page 597 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name LO[m] Feedthrough Ch_LO LO_Thru S<j><k> <i> = RF test port number, <j> = IF test port number,<k> = LO test port number [m] = Mixer number (only if 2 mixers are measured) measured w/o frequency conversion Note that LO parameters can only be measured if a VNA port was selected as the respective LO in the previous step.
  • Page 598 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Depending on your selection, the wizard either closes without calibration or launches one of the mixer measurement-specific SMARTerCal wizards (see Chap- ter 5.12.6.4, "SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) wizard for mixer mode", on page 602 and Chapter 5.12.6.5, "SMARTerCal (Manual) wizard for mixer mode", on page 603).
  • Page 599 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Port selection The port selection lists in the upper part of the dialog contain all analyzer ports or external generators which can provide the RF signal and local oscillator (LO) signals. The fractional numbers in the rectangles indicate the frequency conversion settings from the "Frequency"...
  • Page 600 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool The table in the "Power" tab contains the following columns: ● "Port" contains the RF and IF ports and one or two LO ports, depending on whether the "2nd Mixer" is selected. ●...
  • Page 601 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 2nd Mixer Selects the measurement for a test setup including two mixers (instead of a single one); see Two-stage mixer measurements. The signal diagram and the other control elements in the dialog are adjusted accordingly. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes Conversion...
  • Page 602 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool 5.12.6.4 SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) wizard for mixer mode Allows to perfom a variant of an automatic "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: Channel – [Channel Config] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" – "Start... (Cal Unit)"...
  • Page 603 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool If the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is used as LO and only a 2-port Cal Unit is available, Multi- ple port assignments are required. 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 5-49: System Error Correction Figure 5-50: Scalar Power Calibration 5.12.6.5 SMARTerCal (Manual) wizard for mixer mode Allows to perfom a variant of a manual "SMARTerCal"...
  • Page 604 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.5.7, "SMARTerCal", on page 199 for background information The wizard proceeds as follows: 1. Specify the remaining (non-fixed) properties of the manual SMARTerCal (required hardware, ports, connections etc.) 2.
  • Page 605 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-52: Scalar Power Calibration 5.13 Offset Embed softtool The "Offset Embed" softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port. The offset compensates for the known length and loss of (non-dispersive and per- fectly matched) transmission lines between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT.
  • Page 606 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-53: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function. A green LED on a but- ton indicates that the corresponding deembedding/embedding function is active. If the "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 607 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss Defines the one-way loss parameters of the transmission line at the selected port. In the limit case, where the length of the transmission line is considered to be "almost zero", the loss is considered constant: Otherwise, if the loss at DC and one additional frequency f...
  • Page 608 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Displayed Columns Opens a dialog that lets you select between different ways to specify the offset, similar Delay / Electrical Length / Mech. Length on the Offset tab. 5.13.1.3 Single Ended panel Allows you to activate or deactivate single ended deembedding/embedding for selected physical ports.
  • Page 609 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended tab). This network is defined by its S-parame- ters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p).
  • Page 610 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Use the controls on the right-hand side of the dialog to define the port set and the order of the ports within the port set. Note however that the speed of the de-/embedding calculation depends on the port order.
  • Page 611 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId> 5.13.1.5 Balanced panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate deembedding/embedding of balanced...
  • Page 612 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[: STATe] File Name <i>/Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name <i>" column is enabled as long as the selected Balanced tab comprises a two-port or four-port data network (*.s2p or *.s4p file). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 613 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands. multiple port groups (DUTs) are configured and Ground Loop per Port Group enabled, the panel displays the available port groups.
  • Page 614 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 5.13.1.8 Differential Match panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding.
  • Page 615 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled if a 2-port data Network selected. When loading the touchstone file (*.s2p), the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 616 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool 5.13.2.1 Controls on the Offset tab Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview panel in the Offset Embed dock widget. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports.
  • Page 617 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT. The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(ε ) and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with permittivity ε...
  • Page 618 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con- nector while the antenna is measured at different length offsets.
  • Page 619 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 5.13.2.2 Fixture Compensation dialog This dialog allows you to correct the measurement result for the effects of a test fixture. Access: ●...
  • Page 620 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Direct Compensation With "Direct Compensation", a frequency-dependent transmission factor is calculated; "Auto Length and Loss vs. Direct Compensation" on page 207. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:DFComp[:STATe]? Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short;...
  • Page 621 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-57: Measure Fixture dialog: Direct Compensation (and Prompt for Each Port) "Direct Compensation" data files are standard trace files, containing reflection parame- ter traces for the related port and standard: Table 5-5: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description...
  • Page 622 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Background information Refer to the following sections. ● Chapter 4.6, "Offset parameters and de-/embedding", on page 202 ● Chapter 4.6.1.2, "Definition of loss parameters", on page 203 ● Chapter 4.6.1.4, "Auto Length and Loss", on page 205 ●...
  • Page 623 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool If the measured quantity is a ratio, or if it is derived from a ratio, its receiving port is given as the index of the wave quantity in the numerator. If the active trace shows an S-parameter S , then "Auto Length"...
  • Page 624 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-58: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 625 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: n.a. Network The graphical list contains all available 2-port networks: ● symbol selects "no network" and disables single-ended de-/embedding. ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of an s2p file (see Select File...).
  • Page 626 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> Fixture Tool The "Fixture Tool"...
  • Page 627 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-59: Fixture modeling dialog: SFD - Single Ended Ports Figure 5-60: Fixture modeling dialog: ISD - Balanced Ports Figure 5-61: Fixture modeling dialog: EZD - Single Ended Ports User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 628 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 5.13.5.2, "Measure Coupon", on page 629 The tools differ in the available coupon types. 2.
  • Page 629 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool ● Chapter 5.13.5.8, "EZD Advanced Settings", on page 639 Use Impedance Correction Enables/disables the impedance correction functionality of the respective tool. This is a global setting. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:IMPedance CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:IMPedance (CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:AUTO) Suppress Remeasure Warnings If checked, the Measure Coupon...
  • Page 630 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured. The following coupon types are supported: "Sym 2x Thru" ✓ ✓ ✓ "1x Open" ✓ ✓ – "1x Short" – ✓ ✓ "1x Open, 1x Short" –...
  • Page 631 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Active Before starting to measure the test coupon, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which it is connected. Table 5-6: Allowed numbers of active ports "Sym 2x Thru"...
  • Page 632 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Load File Load DUT + test fixture data from file Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + test fixture at the Active ports. The display area shows all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embed- ding.
  • Page 633 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-62: Save Fixture Model section left = single-ended right = balanced Run <Fixture Modeling Tool> Runs the selected fixure deembedding tool. This button is only active, if both: ● the test coupon measurement finished successfully or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file (see Chapter 5.13.5.2, "Measure Coupon",...
  • Page 634 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Apply Use these checkboxes to indicate the ports (physical for single-ended deembedding, logical for balanced deembedding) to which the deembedding files (generated by <Fixture Modeling Tool>) shall be assigned when the dialog is closed using Apply. Note: For a "left"...
  • Page 635 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-64: Delta-L error messages 5.13.5.6 ISD Advanced Settings Advanced settings of the ISD tool. For details, see the ISD User Guide. For the analyzer firmware, these settings are global. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 636 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": Linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): Non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": The 2x Thru test coupon is split and used directly for deembedding This option can be more accurate if the fixture and the 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
  • Page 637 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool ● "Odd on left" (default): 1, 3, 5, etc. are on the left and ports 2, 4, 6, etc. are on the right. ● "All on left": All ports are on the left Note: Ports on the left/right are assumed to be coupled (if Trace Coupling is not set to...
  • Page 638 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool ● "Weak": Coupling is extracted even if there are 2 ports enabled on the test coupon ● "Strong" (default): If the test coupon is a 4-port file, and there are two ports to be extracted, the ISD tool optimizes odd- and even-mode insertion losses.
  • Page 639 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool 2x Thru Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon ● "Ports 1&3 on Left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
  • Page 640 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Port Order Tells the EZD tool about the port ordering of the test coupon ● "Odd on left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
  • Page 641 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool 5.13.6 Port Sets tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding/embedding arbitrary port sets, defines their parameters, assigns them to a port set and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding/embedding for selected port sets (see Chapter 5.13.1.4, "Port Sets...
  • Page 642 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: The port set number corresponds to the <ListId> numeric suffix in the port set de-/ embedding commands; see e.g. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: DEEMbedding<ListId>[:STATe]. All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any.
  • Page 643 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 644 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-65: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool left = 4 port data file selected for de-/embedding right = other network selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 645 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: n.a. Network The graphical list contains all available 4-port networks (see Chapter 4.6.2.4, "Circuit models for 4-port networks", on page 212). symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port.
  • Page 646 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
  • Page 647 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.6.2.7, "Ground loop de-/embedding", on page 216. If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 549), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out.
  • Page 648 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:G CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "1-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a one-port Touchstone file (*.s1p).
  • Page 649 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool 5.13.9 Differential Match tab Allows you to specify a 2-port embedding network for the differential mode of a bal- anced port. Such a network is either defined ● via its S-parameter stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p) or ●...
  • Page 650 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Logical Port Logical analyzer port, as defined in the "Balanced Ports" configuration. The transfor- mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit; the DUT ports are on the right side. You can define independ- ent embedding networks for all balanced ports.
  • Page 651 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Offset > Calculate after De-/Embed. Changes the position of the "Offset" calculation in the "Offset Embed" calculation chain. If unchecked (default), the offset is calculated before de-/embedding. If checked, it is calculated after de-/embedding. = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command:...
  • Page 652 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool 5.13.11 Deembed Assistant tab The "Deembed Assistant" softtool tab and the related Deembedding Assistant dock widget panel simplify common fixture deembedding scenarios. The deembedding assistant functionality requires at least one of the fixture deembed- ding software options: ●...
  • Page 653 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Fixture Tool/Tool Info The "Fixture Tool" combo-box allows you to select the third-party fixture modeling tool to be used with the deembedding assistant (see Chapter 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling deembedding", on page 217). Use the "Tool Info"...
  • Page 654 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool A section "Coupon B" is only available, if you uncheck "Use Same Coupon Left and Right" on page 657 and specify a file instead of measuring "Coupon B". Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:FILE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:FILE All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any.
  • Page 655 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Depending on the selected fixture tool, it narrows down the selectable types and test coupon models. The first step in setting up a new deembedding with the "Deembedding Assistant" is to select the type of DUT. Depending on the number of available test/DUT ports and the selected fixture tool, choose one of the following DUT types:...
  • Page 656 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:TYPE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:PRESet Left: Model A / Right: Model A|B Allows you to select a coupon type, i.e. to define how the coupling at the left side (lead- in) and right side (lead-out) of the DUT is modeled. If you select the same model for the left and right side and check "Use Same Coupon Left and Right"...
  • Page 657 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool "Uncoupled" This coupon type selection is available only for balanced ports on the DUT. It is used for deembedding a balanced port when it is desired to treat the single-ended legs of the port as uncoupled entities. Figure 5-68: n uncoupled balanced input ports "Coupled"...
  • Page 658 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Overview This button takes you to the Overview panel of the "Offset Embed" dock widget, which allows you to interact with the individual components of the deembedding calculation chain. To reopen the "Deembedding Assistant" panel, you have to click/tap on the "Deembed Assistant"...
  • Page 659 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Depending on the selected DUT, a different set of test coupon types is supported. Test coupon "Sym 2x Thru" "1x Open" "1x Short" "1x Open, 1x Short" ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑...
  • Page 660 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool – For single-ended coupons, any physical port can be selected, even if that port is part of a logical balanced port or port set. – For balanced coupons, you can only select a preciously defined logical port. ●...
  • Page 661 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool The deembedding of single-ended and decoupled ports is assigned as Single Ended, the deembedding of balanced ports as Balanced, and the deembedding of coupled as Port Sets deembedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:IMPCorrect CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:PORT CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:RUN 5.13.12 Delta-L tab...
  • Page 662 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool If either multiple DUTs are configured (see Chapter 5.12.2.3, "Define Parallel Measure- ment dialog", on page 570) or the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related chan- nel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 549), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out).
  • Page 663 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:MEASurement Port Order Declares how the DUT is connected to the measurement system. Choosing the wrong port ordering for your setup, can result in erroneous results. "Sequential" Ports 1, 2 and 3, 4 form input/output pairs "Odd / Even"...
  • Page 664 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Sweep Frequency Defines the sweep range of the Delta-L channel. The entered "Minimum" and "Maxi- mum" values are set as start and stop frequency when the Delta-L settings are applied using "OK". Furthermore, the VNA collects data for the LPI computation a the "Mini- mum"...
  • Page 665 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Access: ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Delta-L" > "Delta-L Measurement" ● Delta-L Settings dialog > "OK" 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement The settings in the "1L Measurement"/"2L Measurement"/"3L Measurement" sections configure and control the measurement of the 1st/2nd/3rd line. The "1L Measurement"...
  • Page 666 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Length ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Specifies the length of the related line. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:LENGth Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings. The firmware enables this action when sufficient data for the required lines are availa-...
  • Page 667 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-70: Method 2L results Markers are added to the smoothed traces at the analysis frequencies. The marker name indicates to which analysis pair it belongs and the computed Delta-L uncertainty. Method 1L For "Method 1L", the Delta-L diagram displays the following traces: ●...
  • Page 668 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 5.14 File softtool The "File" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: ●...
  • Page 669 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool 5.14.1 Recall sets tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml). For background information, see Chapter 4.1.2, "Recall sets",...
  • Page 670 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports two recall set file formats: ● znx (default) Binary file format, supported by all firmware versions of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT ● znxml XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA; supported with firmware ver- sions 3.00 a higher Adds a new setup.
  • Page 671 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool If the recall set to be loaded contains a switch matrix configuration and no differences to the current switch matrix configuration are detected, the recall set is loaded without further inquiry. Otherwise you are asked if you want to adapt the configuration: Select "Cancel"...
  • Page 672 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool In the dialog, proceed as follows: 1. Reassign Matrices: For each "Matrix in Recall Set", select a switch matrix of the same (driver) type as "Assigned Matrix". If no switch matrix of the same type exists, select "Switch Matrix" to open the Exter- nal Matrices dialog that allows you to register/configure additional switch matrices.
  • Page 673 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool 5.14.2 Favorites tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e.: ● If the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...
  • Page 674 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool 5.14.3 Print tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard. Content and layout can be defined in the Printer Setup dialog.
  • Page 675 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool 5.14.4 Printer Setup dialog The "Printer Setup" dialog specifies how the diagram content of, and/or other informa- tion on the active recall set is printed. Printer options are specified in three tabs. The lower part of the dialog shows a preview of the print.
  • Page 676 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool If selected in the "Print other information" group, the content of the "Info Table" (see "Info Table: Show / Position" on page 742) and/or "Setup Info" (see "Setup tab" on page 767) is printed on additional pages. 5.14.4.2 Printer tab The "Printer"...
  • Page 677 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool 5.14.6 More tab The buttons on the "More" tab allow you to load simulation data or close the VNA appli- cation. Loading simulation data is only available for the PC firmware simulation (see Chap- ter 4.7.31, "R&S ZNXSIM",...
  • Page 678 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool Make sure to deactivate "Simulation Noise" before exporting traces to file. Otherwise your exported results comprise an "artificial" random component. Exit Persists the current state of all opened setups and ends the analyzer session. These states are automatically recalled when the analyzer application is restarted.
  • Page 679 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool The source data files (first column), the mapping between physical ports and data file ports (second column), and the S-parameters to be overwritten (third column) can be defined during Add/Insert. The text box below the table shows the full path to the data file of the selected row.
  • Page 680 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File softtool With "Ok" you proceed to the final Step 2: Assign alias ports from file, "Cancel" dis- cards the import definition. Step 3: Select S-parameters ← Add/Insert In the final step, you select the S-parameter data you actually want to overwrite. The GUI is described in Chapter 5.5.11.3, "Select Parameter dialog",...
  • Page 681 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool 5.15 DUT Softtool For 2nd generation R&S ZNB models (order nos. 1334.3330.xx), the "DUT Centric" application was moved to a dedicated "DUT" softtool. For a description see Chap- ter 5.16.3, "DUT Centric application", on page 711.
  • Page 682 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool 5.16.1 External Tools application The "External Tools" application gives access to pre-installed and user-defined external tools. Access: System – [Applic] > "External Tools" GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts.
  • Page 683 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Screen Keyboard Opens the Windows "On-Screen Keyboard". This tool allows you to enter characters, in particular letters, if an input field cannot call up the analyzer's own on-screen key- board, and if no external keyboard is connected. ®...
  • Page 684 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool The "TDR Setup" contains the following sections/controls: ● "TDR Wizard..." Opens the "TDR Wizard" (see Chapter 5.16.2.2, "TDR Wizard", on page 684) ● "Topology" Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog",...
  • Page 685 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Step 1: Port Topology The "Port Topology" step allows you to set up the (balanced) port configuration. ≤ 4 physical ports) Figure 5-71: Port Topology step ( The port configurations are the same as the ones offered on the "Predefined Config" tab of the Balanced Ports dialog.
  • Page 686 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Figure 5-72: Port Topology step (> 4 physical ports) Step 2: Stimulus Settings The "Stimulus Settings" step gives access to the basic settings of the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog and allows you to select the time domain measurements to be per- formed.
  • Page 687 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool 5.16.2.3 TDR Stimulus Settings dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "TDR Setup" > "Stimulus..." After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the lower part of the dialog, as can be seen in the screenshot below.
  • Page 688 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:DLENgth:DATA [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:ELENgth:DATA [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:MLENgth:DATA Permittivity / Velocity Factor Specifies the (relative) permittivity ε of the DUT or, alternatively, its velocity factor 1/ sqrt(ε The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec- tric with permittivity ε...
  • Page 689 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Figure 5-74: TDR Stimulus – Advanced Settings dialog For additional settings, see Chapter 5.5.5, "Time Domain tab", on page 348. Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, "IF Bandwidth" and "Aver- age Factor"...
  • Page 690 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Eye Diagram The "Eye Diagram" checkbox enables the eye diagram with the current settings (default or defined in Eye Diagram dialog) or disables it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe Eye Diagram ... Opens the Eye Diagram dialog that allows to create an eye diagram and to perform basic settings on the simulated digital signal generator.
  • Page 691 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Measurements... If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Measurements..." button brings up a dialog which allows to select and configure the eye measurements to be displayed (if Display Measurements is enabled). The following measurement results can be selectively enabled/disabled: ●...
  • Page 692 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool The "Export Eye Measurements – ASCII Files" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with the additional options of selecting a "Field Separator" (semicolon, comma, tab or space) and a "Decimal Separator" (comma or point). Note that the decimal separator and field separator must be different.
  • Page 693 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE Length Length of the bit stream. For a user defined Bit Stream the length can be specified in terms of bits, Kibits (2^10 bits), Mibits (2^20 bits), Gibits (2^30 bits). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS...
  • Page 694 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Note that for a modulation type other than NRZ, eye masks and eye mask tests are not available (the buttons on the Eye Mask Test tab are grayed out). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation High Level / Low Level Defines the highest/lowest (nominal) voltage level of the multilevel signal that is used to generate the related eye diagram.
  • Page 695 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool "Trace Cumulative Low Color" is the color that is used for the occurrence value 1, "Trace Cumulative High Color" is the color that is used for the most frequent occurren- ces. No occurrence (value 0) is always displayed fully transparent with the background being visible.
  • Page 696 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Generator The "Generator Settings" dialog gives full access to the "virtual" signal generator of the related eye diagram simulation. Most of the settings are also available in the Eye Dia- gram dialog. Access: "Generator" button in the Advanced Settings dialog This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis...
  • Page 697 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Emphasis The "Emphasis" dialog allows you to introduce a pre-emphasis filter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement. "Emphasis" and Equalization can be used to compensate for the signal integrity degradations caused by the DUT. Access: "Emphasis"...
  • Page 698 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool ● Post 1 Cursor = 20 log ( Vb / Va ) ● Post 2 Cursor = 20 log ( Vc / Vb ) Simple applications of the emphasis only define the Post 1 Cursor. Use a negative value (in dB) for increasing the amplitude of the first bit after a transition.
  • Page 699 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Four types of jitter can be configured and selectively enabled: random, periodic, Dirac and user defined. If enabled, the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period, and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog.
  • Page 700 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Dirac This type of jitter is specified by the amplitude in seconds ("Dirac Delta", positive or negative), and the probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period ("Dirac Prob- ability"). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:DELTa CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability...
  • Page 701 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Active Enables/disables noise insertion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe Defines the root mean square noise level. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS The "Define DUT" dialog allows you to switch between different transmission (and reflection) paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties.
  • Page 702 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Measurement / Topolgy "Measurement / Topology" on page 692 DC Value "DC Value" on page 352 Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE Equalization...
  • Page 703 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool CTLE Equalizer Specifies the parameters of the equalizer – a two-pole filter with single zero. With "DC Gain" ω ω s + ω angular frequencies ω = 2πf, the transfer function is given by: H ( s ) = Pole 1 Pole 2...
  • Page 704 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Export Test Results Opens a dialog that allows the user to save the mask test results to an ASCII file. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:EYE:MASK:RESults Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass...
  • Page 705 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Polygon Setup Allows you to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test. The center polygon can either be an octagon, a hexagon, or a rectangle ("Shape" combo-box). The sizes of the polygon can be set using the main/minor widths and heights as shown in the corresponding visualization.
  • Page 706 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Figure 5-79: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off- sets are specified relative to this point.
  • Page 707 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask). An example is shown below: [Mask Top] Active = true Width Top = 9e-009 Offset Top = 6 [Mask Bottom] Active = true...
  • Page 708 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Access: [Applic] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement. The rise time measurement can only be performed if the active trace is Real, Time Domain is enabled, and the transformation Type "Low Pass Step"...
  • Page 709 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for both the active trace and the reference trace: ●...
  • Page 710 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:POSition Extended Info Defines whether the info field for the skew measurement shall only provide basic infor- mation (default) or extended information: Figure 5-81: Skew info, basic vs. extended The displayed skew values are positive, if, at the defined Skew Position, the active trace is to the right of the...
  • Page 711 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Y Axis" This tab is only visible if the Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 is available. 5.16.2.13 X Axis tab The "X Axis" tab allows you to define the x axis scaling of the active diagram. The scal- ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types, see Chapter 5.4, "Scale softtool",...
  • Page 712 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Access: System – [Applic] > "DUT Centric" For 2nd generation R&S ZNB (order nos 1334.3330.*) this application was moved to a dedicated DUT Softtool softtool (System – [DUT]). 5.16.3.1 DUT Centric Wizard The "DUT Centric Wizard" guides you through the measurement setup for certain fun- damental DUT types.
  • Page 713 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Currently the wizard only offers support for "Amplifier" measurements. Other DUT types may be added in future releases of the analyzer firmware. 2. Specify the (basic) properties of your DUT. 3. Specify how the DUT is connected to the VNA. 4.
  • Page 714 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded: Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager" to persist new/modified mixer settings to the DUT man- ager when you proceed to the next step of the "DUT Centric Wizard".
  • Page 715 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Figure 5-82: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 5-83: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources (on the and connected external...
  • Page 716 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements. Depending on the "Measurement Selection"...
  • Page 717 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" ● summarizes the channels to be created and the parameters to be measured ●...
  • Page 718 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Guided amplifier setup Define DUT The "Define DUT" step allows you to specify basic properties of an amplifier or load them from the DUT Manager. Similar to the Amplifier Configuration dialog of the Manager.
  • Page 719 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool DUT/VNA connections The "DUT/VNA Connections" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT. Figure 5-84: Mixer/VNA connections User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 62...
  • Page 720 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Figure 5-85: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources (on the and connected external generators).
  • Page 721 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements. Depending on the "Measurement Selection"...
  • Page 722 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you finish the "DUT Centric Wizard" with "Calibrate Newly Created Channels" selected, then, after creating the required (setup and) channels, the FW will proceed with suitable calibrations. Guided Calibration wizard The "Guided Calibration"...
  • Page 723 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Step 2: calibration settings Defines power settings that apply to all subsequent calibrations and allows you to select some optional calibration steps. Step 3: ports and calibration types In step 3 the "Guided Calibration" wizards excutes the calibration parts of a set of stan- dard calibration wizards for system error correction and power calibration.
  • Page 724 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Data of completed calibrations are saved, data of incomplete calibrations are discar- ded. 5.16.3.2 DUT Manager dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs. Access: ● System – [Applic] > "Application: DUT Centric" > "DUT Manager..." ●...
  • Page 725 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. See Chapter 4.7.4, "Frequency conversion measurements", on page 236. Allows you to create a user-defined DUT. Filter by DUT Type is set to a particular DUT type, a DUT of this type is created immediately.
  • Page 726 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Access: DUT Manager dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Amplifier" selected Mixer Configuration dialog The "Mixer Configuration" dialog allows you to set up the fundamental properties of a mixer. Access: DUT Manager dialog >...
  • Page 727 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Embedded LO Select "Embedded LO" if in the related mixer measurement the LO cannot be provided by the VNA or a connected external generator. Setting this flag makes the LO drive power range read-only. Use Fixed Freq Uncheck "Use Fixed Freq"...
  • Page 728 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool A standard DtF measurement is prepared in the order from top to bottom: 1. Enable DtF measurement, see "Distance to Fault" on page 728 2. Configure the distance window, see "Start Distance / Stop Distance" on page 729 3.
  • Page 729 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool ● enables additional controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab ● appends the selected cable type to the trace label (see "Cable Type..." on page 730) ● displays an additional "Distance Domain" trace info line below the channel line Note that all info lines (channel info, trace info,"Distance Domain"...
  • Page 730 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool The required number of points depends on: ● the frequency span Δf = f – f (see "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center stop start Frequency / Span Frequency" on page 414), ●...
  • Page 731 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Select "Available Cable Types..." to access the list of predefined and user-defined cable types (see Chapter 5.16.4.2, "Available Cable Types... dialog", on page 732). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal... (P2) Refl OSM Sets up and runs the "Calibration Unit"/"Calibration Setting"...
  • Page 732 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Fault Limit Determines the level above which peaks in the active "Distance to Fault" trace are con- sidered as faults. The fault limit is defined relative to the 0 dB-line in the test diagram, i.e. the peak response value for total reflection after proper calibration.
  • Page 733 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool expressed in units of dB/m. Due to the skin effect and various other factors, the attenu- ation is frequency-dependent. For predefined cables, the table is read-only. Access: Available Cable Types... dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNB/ZNBT calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f...
  • Page 734 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 5.16.4.3 Fault List dock widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 5-86: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active...
  • Page 735 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Export to File... ← Contents Opens a dialog that allows to export the (filtered) content of the fault list to an ASCII file with configurable "Field Separator" and "Decimal Separator". This CSV type file contains one line (terminated by CR+LF) per fault. With ";" as "Field Separator"...
  • Page 736 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Related settings Use the icons in the toolbar to add diagrams and traces. Use the "Zoom Active Trc" icon to zoom into a rectangular portion inside a diagram. See also Chapter 3.3.5, "Han- dling diagrams, traces, and markers", on page 66 and...
  • Page 737 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] Delete Diagram Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. The remaining diagrams are renumbered; each recall set always contains diagrams with contiguous numbers. "Delete Diag Area" is disabled if the recall set contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
  • Page 738 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole screen. This function is available irrespective of the trace format and the channel set- tings; it is even possible to overlay Cartesian and complex diagrams. The active trace and active channel is highlighted.
  • Page 739 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool 5.17.2 Split tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen. Some of the "Split" settings are also available in the Diagram tab. Refer to the following sections: ● "Overlay All" on page 738 ● "Split All"...
  • Page 740 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool If less than two (three / four) traces are available, the new diagrams are created with a default trace. Dual (triple / quad) split corresponds to "Split Type: Tile Horizontal" with 2 (3 / 4) diagrams. Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagrams, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Diagram"...
  • Page 741 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool 5.17.3 Config tab Displays or hides controls and information elements of the screen and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams. Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
  • Page 742 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool ● "Black and White Solid" sets a white background color. All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black. All traces are drawn with solid lines. "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements.
  • Page 743 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool The info table is a possible container for info fields and can be placed to the bottom, to the left, or to the right of the screen. See also Chapter 5.7.8, "Info Field tab", on page 412.
  • Page 744 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Element Selects the diagram element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 745 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
  • Page 746 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Remote command: Display color scheme only! DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way.
  • Page 747 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window". Info Window Configuration dialog The "Info Window Configuration" dialog allows you to select the markers and Display elements of a diagram results to be displayed in the...
  • Page 748 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool Figure 5-88: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 5.17.4 View Bar tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
  • Page 749 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display softtool The "Hard Key Panel" can also be closed via the "X" button in its top right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:HKEY[:STATe] Title Bar Task Bar Toggles the visibility of the title bar of the VNA application window and the Windows® task bar.
  • Page 750 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool ● Lock screen – all control elements are locked. Pressing any front panel key on the analyzer (or sending SYSTem:TSLock OFF) re-enables touchscreen control. Remote command: SYSTem:TSLock 5.18 Setup softtool The "Setup" softtool allows you to define various system-related settings, to manage global resources, to get system information and to execute service functions.
  • Page 751 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool (Runs the selftest first) ● "Service Function...": Service Function dialog Language Selects the language of the graphical user interface. A message box indicates that the vector network analyzer application needs to be restarted to activate a different lan- guage.
  • Page 752 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool ● Presets tab......................752 ● Calibration tab....................... 753 ● User Interface tab....................755 ● Messages tab......................757 ● Channel Bits tab....................758 ● Advanced tab......................759 ● Power tab......................761 ● Recovery tab......................763 ● HUMS tab......................763 Presets tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT upon a preset.

  • Page 753: Calibration Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Preset Configuration Specifies whether the preset action performs a factory preset or restores a user preset file. A user preset file is an arbitrary recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml), that can be cre- ated from the active setup using System – [File] > "Save...". If the current user preset file is not found (e.g.
  • Page 754 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active. Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration.

  • Page 755: User Interface Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Search Path for additional Cal Kits and Connector Types Contains the name and path of a special directory for cal kit files (*.calkit). All cal kit files in the special directory are loaded automatically as predefined kits (i.e. read- only kits which cannot be modified) every time the VNA application is started.
  • Page 756 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Show Sweep Symbols This checkbox turns sweep symbols on or off. Sweep symbols are arrows pointing downward onto the trace. They are displayed if the sweep time exceeds an upper limit, e.g. if the number of points is high or the measure- ment bandwidth is low.

  • Page 757: Messages Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACes:CCOunt Decimal Places Defines the number of fractional digits for quantities with different physical units. The settings affect entries and results, e.g. the values in the marker lists. Note: If your instrument is equipped with option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K19, 1 mHz Fre- quency Resolution, set "Decimal Places"...

  • Page 758: Channel Bits Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:STATe Show Info Messages / Show Warning Messages / Show Error Messages Selectively disables/enables display of information popups for the related event type. If information popups are globally switched off (Show Instrument Messages unchecked), these buttons are disabled.

  • Page 759: Advanced Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool The decimal values have the following effect: ● 0 means that no output signals are enabled at any of the pins 8, 9, 10, 11 and 16, 17, 18, 19. ● 1 enables the output signal at pin 8. The signal is switched on while a measure- ment sweep is running in the selected channel.
  • Page 760 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter Error Dump Type Determines the level of detail ("Minimal", "Normal", "Large", "Full") and hence the size of the dump files that are created if a firmware exception occurs. "None" disables dump file creation.

  • Page 761: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool TTL Pass Default Values Defines the default values of TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass for new traces. Remote command: SYSTem:TTLout<Pt>:STATus[:STATe] Power tab The settings in this tab define global power settings of the VNA. Power Reduction at Sweep End The power reduction settings apply to all sweep modes but are particularly useful in single sweep mode.
  • Page 762 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Power Mode at Sweep End ← Power Reduction at Sweep End The analyzer offers three power modes at sweep end: ● "Auto" results in the shortest measurement time (default setting). If enabled, at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored.

  • Page 763: Recovery Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:AGC:GLOBal:METHod Recovery tab Provides a single function "Boot into Recovery Screen" that allows you reboot the instrument and launch the "R&S Recovery Environment". From there you can restore the original system image (including operating system and firmware). Chapter 12.2, "System recovery", on page 1538.
  • Page 764 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Common controls State (Device Utilization)/Status Enables/disables the HUMS service. The "Status" LED indicates the current state of the HUMS service: ● grey: inactive ● green: up and runnning If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings.
  • Page 765 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool An SNMP community represents a collection of devices and agents grouped to monitor them. Authorized managers and the managed devices belong to an SNMP community. You can specify different communities for read-write and read-only access. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW...
  • Page 766 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL? DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL 5.18.1.3 Info dialog The "Info" dialog displays information about the instrument and its operation. All func- tions are primarily intended for error diagnostic and service purposes; see Chapter 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support",...
  • Page 767 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support for fault diagnosis; see Chapter 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support", on page 1532. Remote command: DIAGnostic:DEVice:STATe SYSTem:DFPRint?
  • Page 768 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Options tab Shows the installed software and hardware options. You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option. Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog. For an overview of options, refer to Chapter 4.7, "Optional extensions and accesso- ries", on page 221.
  • Page 769 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Configured External Switch Matrices The "Hardware" tab also provides information about connected switch matrices. In par- ticular, for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported (if suppor- ted by the matrix). Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:RELays:SWITch:COUNt? Selftest tab...
  • Page 770 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Service tab Allows you to read or specify service-related information. This information can be read R&S HUMS, however, it does not require the corresponding option R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K980. Next Calibration Due The date (and time) the instrument needs calibration to be done. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE Recommended Calibration Interval...
  • Page 771 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Last Calibration The last date (and time) the instrument was calibrated. Typically set by Rohde&Schwarz service. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE 5.18.1.4 Operators Check wizard Welcome page The "Operators Check" wizard allows you to perform selftests and other helpful checks from one central place in the analyzer GUI.
  • Page 772 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Selftest page In case you selected "Selftest" on the Welcome page, the next step in the "Operators Check" wizard is the standard selftest functionality of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware. Execute/Repeat Executes the selftest for the first time in this "Operators Check" wizard session, or repeats it.
  • Page 773 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool The upper part of the page allows you to define the checks, which can then be run with the "Execute" button. The results are displayed in the "Log" area. Figure 5-90: Log area Power check definition For each physical VNA port, you can decide whether to perform a power check ("Active"), whether to use default or custom settings ("Default Settings"), and whether...
  • Page 774 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool The available GUI elements for the limit line definition are the same as in the general- purpose limit line setup dialog. For their description, see Chapter 5.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines dialog", on page 377. Prompt before every port check This option comes in handy if you want to connect a particular device such as a reflec- tion standard to the related port before you...
  • Page 775 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Print Allows you to print the "Summary" of the executed tests, similar to the Print... function- ality of the system "Info" dialog. Report Same functionality as Create R&S Support Information in the system "Info" dialog. 5.18.1.5 Service Function dialog The "Service Function"...
  • Page 776 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] Service Function Identifier of the service function in "dotted textual" (example: sw.common.mem- ory_usage) or "dotted decimal" (example: 0.1.18.0) representation. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction 5.18.2 Freq. Ref. tab Selects a reference signal for synchronization between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and exter- nal devices.
  • Page 777 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 5.18.3 Remote Settings tab Configures the remote control interfaces of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. 5.18.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. By default, the analyzer is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address information automatically.
  • Page 778 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool INITiate[:IMMediate][:DUMMy] is modified; refer to the remote control docu- mentation in Chapter 7.3.8, "INITiate commands", on page 1132. ● The ZVR language ensures compatibility with network analyzers of the R&S ZVR family. See also Chapter 7.5, "R&S ZVR/ZVABT compatible commands", on page 1463.
  • Page 779 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Advanced ... Opens a dialog that allows to set the following parameters: ● "Wait for Data after Sweep" determines the execution behavior of INITiate[:IMMediate] commands (see Chapter 7.3.8, "INITiate commands", on page 1132). If enabled, an automatic *WAI is added (see Chapter 7.2, "Common commands",...
  • Page 780 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool 5.18.4.1 Controls on the External Devices tab The buttons in the "External Devices" panel open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 5.18.4.2, "External Power Meters dialog", on page 780 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 5.18.4.3, "External Power Meter Config dia- log", on page 784...
  • Page 781 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.27, "External power meters", on page 265. The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface.
  • Page 782 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Note: Even though an R&S NRP2 power meter can appear in the table of "Known Devices", adding it to the list of "Configured Devices" directly results in an invalid con- figuration. Use Add Device to configure it manually instead.
  • Page 783 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" initiates an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Power Meters"...
  • Page 784 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ● "Identify" sends an identification query ("IDN?") to the specified device address to identify the type and serial number of the connected power meter and select an appropriate driver file.
  • Page 785 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors. See Application Note 1GP70 "Using S-Parame- ters with R&S®NRP-Z Power Sensors" for background information. This Application Note is available on the Rohde &...
  • Page 786 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps: 1. Connect the generator to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the generator is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection" 3.
  • Page 787 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: n.a. Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured generators ("Add Device", opens the "Add External Generator" dialog) may be changed in the dialog. The following generator properties are not defined in the "Add External Generator"...
  • Page 788 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" will send an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Generators"...
  • Page 789 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool an appropriate driver file. Generator driver files (*.gen) are stored in the Resources\ExtDev subdirectory of the analyzer's program directory. Table 5-9: Interface types for external generators and address formats Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector)
  • Page 790 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool ● The ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, so connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. ● For background information, see Chapter 4.5.5.4, "Inline calibration", on page 186.
  • Page 791 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Chapter 4.7.29.4, "Multiple paths: precision vs. speed", on page 273 for back- ground information. The selection is only enabled, if at least one of the connected switch matrices has mul- tiple routes with non-identical priorities. 5.18.5.2 Define Physical Ports dialog Allows you to redefine the physical VNA ports (see...
  • Page 792 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool The registration of a new external switch matrix typically involves the following steps: 1. Connect the switch matrix to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT via USB or LAN. 2. If you have connected switch matrix and VNA to the LAN: a) Enable "LAN Detection".
  • Page 793 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Known Devices Table with the discovered switch matrices. "Scan Instruments" refreshes the table; copies a discovered switch matrix to the table of "Configured Devices". Remote command: Configured Devices Table displaying the registered switch matrices. A distinction is made between those switch matrices that are used in RF connections (see Chapter 5.18.5.5, "Switch Matrix RF Connections...
  • Page 794 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" sends an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "Exter- nal Switch Matrix"...
  • Page 795 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:DEFine SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:SERial? Delete All Unregisters all switch matrices, automatically deleting all switch matrix RF connections. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:DELete 5.18.5.4 Device LAN Configuration dialog The "Device LAN Configuration" dialog allows you to read and to modify the "IP Config- uration"...
  • Page 796 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool 5.18.5.5 Switch Matrix RF Connections dialog The "Switch Matrix RF Connections" dialog allows you to define the RF connections between the VNA and the switch matrices, and the test port numbering. Access: System – [Setup] > "External Ports" > "RF Connections..." Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.29, "External switch...
  • Page 797 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool A redefinition of the physical VNA ports (see Chapter 5.18.5.2, "Define Physical Ports dialog", on page 791) causes a factory reset and deletes all switch matrix RF connec- tions. So the RF configuration for switch matrices has to be done after the port redefini- tion.
  • Page 798 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool Select some matrices and tap "OK" to remove them from the RF connection configura- tion or tap "Cancel" to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix from the RF connection configuration. Delete All Opens a confirmation dialog Either select "OK"...
  • Page 799 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup softtool In the "Edit" dialog, define the appropriate VNA port or "Set Unused" to delete the matrix VNA port connection. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MVNA SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection, tap on the corresponding port symbol. In the "Edit"...
  • Page 800 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Help softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MTESt SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLTest SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:CONFigure:TVNA 5.19 Help softtool The "Help" softtool presents the functions of the menu bar's "Help" menu, except call- ing context sensitive help. Access: "Help" – "Contents..." | "Index..." | "About..." from the menu bar. Contents...
  • Page 801 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys Open the Info dialog for full information about the instrument. 5.20 Additional Function Keys The System hardkey panel also provides the Windows®, [Help] and [Preset] keys that do not open a softtool but perform an immediate action. The data entry panel provides hardkeys for undo and redo.
  • Page 802 ® GUI reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys In the Toolbar, the corresponding icons are disabled (grayed out) if an undo or redo is not possible. In general, the undo and redo actions are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB.
  • Page 803 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control 6 Remote control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Chapter 7, "Command...
  • Page 804 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control HiSLIP protocol The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is a protocol for TCP-based instru- ments specified by the IVI foundation. Compared to its predecessor VXI-11, it provides speed and other improvements. HiSLIP is encapsulated in VISA; the resource string reads TCPIP::<R&S ZNB/ZNBT IP address>::hislip0.
  • Page 805 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control 1st generation (1311.6010Kxx) 2nd generation (1334.3330Kxx) R&S ZNBT26 0x01F3 R&S ZNBT40 0x01F4 Hence a possible resource string for the R&S ZNBT20 is USB1::0x0AAD:: 0x01A7::100067::INSTR. 6.1.2 Starting a remote control session A remote control program must open a connection to the analyzer (using VISA func- tionality), before it can send commands to the analyzer and receive device responses (e.g.
  • Page 806 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control The following options are provided: ● NT named pipe (currently not supported) ● GPIB address (for connection to controllers equipped with a National Instruments GPIB interface using the GPIB bus connector) ●...
  • Page 807 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control It remote logging is enabled (SYSTem:LOGGing:REMote[:STATe] ON) the analyzer stores all received commands to the file 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\RemoteLog'. 6.1.4 Switchover to remote control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls.
  • Page 808 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control In case the "Remote" softtool is not visible, tap/click on the toucscreen/application win- dow to restore it. The softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state: ●...
  • Page 809 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.
  • Page 810 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to remote control trol. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are permissible. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. SCPI commands: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 6.1.4.2 Returning to manual operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control. ●...
  • Page 811 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages 6.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
  • Page 812 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
  • Page 813 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
  • Page 814 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands.
  • Page 815 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 6.2.3 SCPI parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
  • Page 816 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 6.2.3.2 Boolean parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.
  • Page 817 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic remote control concepts 6.2.3.6 Overview of syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.
  • Page 818 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic remote control concepts The following frequently used commands create and delete traces, channels, and dia- gram areas: Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>', '< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>'...
  • Page 819 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic remote control concepts ● The active traces for manual and remote control may be different. The following program example illustrates how to create, select and reference traces. It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen in order to check the effect of each step. Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no.
  • Page 820 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic remote control concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 6.4, "Command processing",...
  • Page 821 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 6-4: Mixed commands Method...
  • Page 822 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.
  • Page 823 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 6.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 832). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
  • Page 824 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command processing Example: Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable. Sending :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI.
  • Page 825 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.
  • Page 826 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system ● Output buffer: contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB. All status registers have the same internal structure, see Structure of a SCPI status register.
  • Page 827 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system not used not used not used -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 14 -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 13 -&- -&- -&- not used Limit trace no.
  • Page 828 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register. The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can lead to a Service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
  • Page 829 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 830 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 6.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 831 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a Serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE? . 6.5.3.2 IST flag and PPE In analogy to the Service request (SRQ), the Individual STatus (IST) flag combines the...
  • Page 832 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Execution error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between –200 and –300, which describes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
  • Page 833 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower level STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register are defined as follows: Bit No. Meaning LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
  • Page 834 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system Refer to the Chapter 9, "Error messages and troubleshooting", on page 1528 for a detailed description of hardware errors including possible remedies. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register are defined as follows. Bit No.
  • Page 835 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Instrument temperature is too high This bit is set if the analyzer detects that the instrument temperature is too high. Reduce ambient temperature, keep ventilation holes of the casing unobstructed. OCXO cold This bit is set if the oven for the internal high precision clock (option B4) is not at its operat- ing temperature.
  • Page 836 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system 6.5.4 Application of the status reporting system The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices.
  • Page 837 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system The R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates an SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register occurs, i.e. when any point on the first trace fails the limit check. Example: Find out which event caused an SRQ The procedure to find out which event caused an SRQ is analogous the procedure to generate an SRQ: 1.
  • Page 838 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system The parallel poll method is used to find out quickly which one of the instruments con- nected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must be set to the same value.
  • Page 839 ® Remote control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status reporting system 6.5.5 Reset values of the status reporting system The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. DCL, SDC (Device Clear, Selected Device Clear) Event Switching on DCL, SDC...
  • Page 840 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Special terms and notation 7 Command reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.
  • Page 841 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Special terms and notation 7.1.1 Upper- vs. lower-case Upper-/lower-case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters.
  • Page 842 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Common commands The analyzer provides numeric suffixes for channels, traces, ports, markers etc. If unspecified, a numeric suffix is replaced by 1. The number of ports depends on the analyzer model. No restrictions apply to number of markers, channel, trace, and diagram suffixes.
  • Page 843 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Command Parameters / Remarks Short Description *OPT? – Queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The response consists of arbitrary ASCII response data according to OPTion identification query only IEEE 488.2.
  • Page 844 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ● INITiate commands..................... 1132 ● INSTrument commands..................1135 ● MEMory commands.................... 1136 ● MMEMory commands..................1138 ● OUTPut commands.....................1178 ● PROGram commands..................1183 ● [SENSe:] commands................... 1186 ● SOURce commands................... 1331 ● STATus commands.....................
  • Page 845 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:CALValidate:CHARacteriza <String> Selects the CalU characterization to be used for the cal validation. to select the CalU standard to be used CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard for the validation. Parameters: <String> *RST: 'Factory' Manual operation: "Characterization" on page 510 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer <Port>, <Value>...
  • Page 846 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard <Standard> Selects the CalU standard to be used for cal validation. Parameters: <Standard> OPEN | SHORt | MATCh 7.3.1.2 CALCulate:DATA... The CALCulate:DATA... commands provide access to the results of a measure- ment.
  • Page 847 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Before the import, the target trace must be prepared according to the settings used during export. Any request for new data from the hardware ("Restart Sweep" in sin- gle sweep mode or switching to continuous sweep mode) discards imported data and switches back the display to measured data.
  • Page 848 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Writing memory traces *RST; SWE:POIN 3 Create a data trace 'Trc1' with 3 sweep points, making the cre- ated trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mne- monic SENSe1). TRAC:COPY 'MemTrc1','Trc1';...

  • Page 849: Calculate:Data

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Error Term Description Receive Ports (S-parameter) SCORr14 Source match 3 (S33) SCORr15 Reflection tracking 3 (S33) SCORr16 Isolation 3 (S31) SCORr17 Load match 3 (S31) SCORr18 Transmission tracking 3 (S13) SCORr19 Isolation 1 (S13) SCORr20 Load match...
  • Page 850 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL <Format>, <Data>... The query reads the current response values of all S-parameter data traces at channel <Ch>'s data access point <DACPoint>. If a full n-port system error correction is active in the related channel, the command reads the full nxn S-matrix of the calibrated ports (there is no need to create or display the S-parameter traces).

  • Page 851: Calculate:Data:call

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL:CATalog? Returns all traces which are available for in channel CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL no. <Ch>. The response is a string parameter with all S-parameter traces in the current channel or in the active system error correction; see example. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 852: Calculate:Data:mdata:interpolate

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:DALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all data traces of the current recall set. Use to query data traces and memory traces. CALCulate:DATA:ALL? Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
  • Page 853 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters: <Format> SDATa Read unformatted sweep data (fixed parameter): Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point (2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format).

  • Page 854: Calculate:Data:sgroup

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Query parameters: <Format> SDATa Read unformatted sweep data (fixed parameter): Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point (2 values per trace point, irrespective of the selected trace format). <RvCount> Number of sweep to be read.
  • Page 855 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>... The query gets the trace data of an arbitrary (not necessarily the active) trace, refer- enced by its trace name <TraceName>. The "set direction" allows to import formatted or unformatted trace data to an existing trace (data access point 3 or 2 in Chapter 4.1.5, "Data flow",...
  • Page 856 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Query parameters: <Data> If omitted, a single numeric value is returned. If ALL is specified, the result consists of 6 numeric values. Furthermore, the inter- pretation of the result values depends on the active trace's stim- ulus axis (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis).
  • Page 857 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit <arg0> Defines the limit value for the skew check. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <arg0> Limit value in seconds or meters, depending on the format of the current trace's stimulus axis (see CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:XAXis).
  • Page 858 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Note: The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for both the active trace and the reference trace: ● the trace format is real (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat REAL) ● Time Domain is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ●...
  • Page 859 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ..............863 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS ..............864 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS ................ 864 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation ................865 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel ................865 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel ...............865 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:DATA ...............865 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:THReshold ..............866 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:DELTa ............. 866 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability ............867 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency ............867 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude ..............867 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe ............868 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation ................
  • Page 860 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE <DUTMode> Allows to (temporarily) switch between the measured DUT and an ideal one (with flat frequency response) in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 861 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Weight> Weight relative to the "Cursor" tap *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 698 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:STATe <Boolean> Activates/deactivates pre-emphasis in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 862 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference The equalizer can be enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE: EQUalization:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <1|2> Parameters: <CTLE Poles> Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 703 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:ZERO <CTLE Zero>...

  • Page 863: Calculate:Eye:input:length:bits

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE <BitPattern> Defines the type of bit stream to be simulated for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 864 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Before executing this command, the pattern type must be set to USER (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE). Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <BitLength> Stream length, specified with units BITS, KIBITS (2^10 BITS), MIBITS (2^20 BITS), or GIBITS (2^30 BITS) Default unit: BITS Options:...

  • Page 865: Calculate:Eye:input:olevel

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel <OneLevel> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel <VoltageLevel> Defines the highest/lowest (nominal) voltage level of the simulated digital signal gener- ating the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 866 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <RiseThreshold> T1_9 | T2_8 T1_9: 10% to 90% (of the voltage amplitude between 1-level and 0-level) This is the default threshold for eye diagrams. T2_8: 20% to 80% Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition"...
  • Page 867 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency <PeriodicFrequency> Defines the frequency of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 868 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicPhase> *RST: 0 deg Default unit: deg Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 699 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation <StdDeviation> Defines the standard deviation of the random jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.

  • Page 869: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 699 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac <Boolean> Enables/disables Dirac jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 870: Calculate:Eye:mask Auto

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:RANDom <Boolean> Enables/disables random jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The standard deviation can be set using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom: STDDeviation.

  • Page 871: Calculate:Eye:mask:data

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Automatic Mask Generation" on page 707 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:CENTer:HORizontal <HorizontalOffset> Defines the horizontal center of the eye mask in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 872: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate1:EYE:MASK:DATA? returns something like 'Eye Mask ------------------------------ Fail Condition Type Samples Violation Tolerance 1 Total Number of Samples 10342 Mask 1 (Top) Active Samples Hits 366 Fail Rate 3.539 % Test Result Fail Mask 2 (Bottom) Not Active Samples Hits ------ Fail Rate ------...

  • Page 873: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail:beep

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Return values: <TestResults> Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 703 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Deprecated command: Since version 3.45, generating sounds is no longer supported by the analyzer firmware. Defines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on mask failures in the related eye diagram.

  • Page 874: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:bottom:horizontal

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:HORizontal <Width> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:HORizontal <Width> Defines the width of the bottom/top rectangle in the eye mask of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 875 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe CALCulate<Chn>: to activate or deactivate the area in the eye mask. EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe The eye mask test is enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Offset>...

  • Page 876: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:polygon:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 705 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The geometric interpretation depends on the selected polygon type (see on page 875):...

  • Page 877: Calculate:Eye:mask:violation:rate

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 703 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE <ViolationRate> Defines the violation rate (i.e. the share of bad samples) for the mask test in the related eye diagram.
  • Page 878 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference The return value is of type string and returns the eye measurement results in csv for- mat with decimal separator "." and field separator "," (see also MMEMory:STORe:EYE: MEASurements). Note that the full set of measurement results is only available for NRZ modulated gen- erator signals (see on page 864).

  • Page 879: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe <Boolean> Defines the visibility of the result info field in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 880 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <NoiseRMS> Default unit: V Manual operation: "RMS" on page 701 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables Gaussian noise in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 881 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Encoder" on page 696 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass <Boolean> Enables/disables a single pole low pass filter in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram measurement. The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut: on page 865) and rise time definition (see...
  • Page 882 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <EyeView> STIMulus | EMPHasis | JITTer | NOISe | DUT | EQUalization The rightmost building block that shall be part of the calculation chain STIMulus > EMPHasis > JITTer > NOISe > DUT > EQUali- zation.
  • Page 883 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns. CALCulate:FILTer:GATE:TIME:AOFFset ON Activate an offset of the time gate according to a new delay set- ting.
  • Page 884 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <SidebandSupp> Sideband suppression Range: 10 dB to 120 dB Increment: 10 dB *RST: 32 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALC:FILT:TIME:WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev time gate for filtering the data in the frequency domain.
  • Page 885 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer Manual operation: "Show Range Lines" on page 354 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <Span> Defines the span of the time gate. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Span> Span of the time gate. Range: 2E-012 s to 200 s Increment: 0.1 ns...
  • Page 886 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe <Boolean> Determines whether the time gate for trace no. <Chn> is enabled. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON - time gate enabled OFF - time gate disabled *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 887 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT - steepest edges (rectangle) HANN - normal gate (Hann) HAMMing - steep edges (Hamming) BOHMan - minimum flatness (Bohman) DCHebyshev - arbitrary gate shape (Dolph-Chebychev) *RST:...
  • Page 888 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K220 | R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K230 | R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Coupon A / Coupon B section" on page 658 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:FILE <CouponType>, <Path> CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:FILE <CouponType>, <Path> Loads the properties of a test coupon for the lead-in/lead-out of the DUT. Parameters: <CouponType>...
  • Page 889 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:PORT <Position>, <PortNum> CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:PORT <Position>, <PortNum> Defines the port or ports for measuring the selected test coupon (CALCulate: FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:TYPE) Parameters: <Position> UPLeft | UPRight UPLeft Left side of the test coupon UPRight Right side of the test coupon (SYMMetric2x only) Setting parameters: <PortNum>...
  • Page 890 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference OPEN1x 1 x Open SHORt1x 1 x Short Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K220 | R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K230 | R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Coupon A / Coupon B section" on page 658 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure Measures DUT + fixture at the ports defined using CALCulate:FMODel: DEASsistant:DUT:PORT.
  • Page 891 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Depending on the number of available test/DUT ports and the selected fixture tool (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:TOOL), choose the appropriate <DutType>. Parameters: <DutType> SEX | SEXSe | BX | BXB | BXSE | SE21 | SE22 | NXSE | NXMSe | NXB | NXMB 1 x single-ended SEXSe...
  • Page 892 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference BALanced Balanced; for balanced lead-ins/outs COUPled Coupled ports; for lead-ins/outs with more than two logical ports UNCoupled Coupled ports; for lead-ins/outs with more than two physical ports Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K220 | R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K230 | R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Left: Model A / Right: Model A|B"...
  • Page 893 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference This simplification is allowed for two-sided DUTs using the same coupon model for the left and right side (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT| RIGHt:TYPE). Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) | OFF (0), where ON means only the left coupon model is measured (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon: LEFT:MEASure) or loaded from file...
  • Page 894 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ..........897 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL ........... 897 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USER:COUNt? ............897 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:ALL ........... 897 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:SELected ................898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode ................ 898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:FILename ................ 898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:FILename ................ 898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:FILename ................898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:LENGth ................898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:LENGth ................898 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:LENGth ................. 899 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure .................
  • Page 895 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:CURRent? Returns the frequencies at which the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties. You can use the algorithms's default or custom frequencies (see CALCulate: FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USEDefault). Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies"...
  • Page 896 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USEDefault <Boolean> Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies. This command specifies whether to use the tool's default frequencies or custom fre- quencies, which can be defined using CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FRE commands.

  • Page 897: Calculate:fmodel:delt:frequencies:user:delete:all

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies: USEDefault). This command clears the list of custom frequencies. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies"...
  • Page 898 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, relative to the cache directory. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Clear All 1L Measurements/Clear Selected 1L Measure- ments" on page 666 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode <Boolean>...

  • Page 899: Calculate:fmodel:delt:m1L:measure

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Length" on page 666 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure Measures the full set of S-parameters at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMO Del:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L|M2L|M3L[:STATe]). Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Measure"...

  • Page 900: Calculate:fmodel:delt:run

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference *RST: SINGleended Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Measurements" on page 662 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:METHod <Method> Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Parameters: <Method> M1L | M2L | M3L One, two, or three line/length analysis Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation:...

  • Page 901: Calculate:fmodel:delt:sweep:control

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference The resulting frequency step size and IF bandwidth can be queried using CALCulate: on page 901 and FMODel:DELT:SWEep:CONTrol:STEP? CALCulate:FMODel: on page 901, respectively. DELT:SWEep:CONTrol:IFBW? Parameters: <SweepControl> DEFault | CURRent DEFault Use the default values of the Delta-L algorithm: 10 MHz frequency step size, 1 kHz IF bandwidth SweepControl Use the values of the active channel...
  • Page 902 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Frequency> Frequency values The default MINimum frequency is the standard Delta-L start fre- quency of 10 MHz. The default MAXimum frequency is either 20 GHz or the instrument's maximum frequency, whichever is smaller.
  • Page 903 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ..............903 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure ............ 903 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename .......... 903 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............904 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] ................904 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DCEXtrapolat ................904 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure ............904 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename ..........905 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ..............905 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] ..............905 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:GENerate:SIDE<1|2> ................906 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance ..............906 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit ..............906 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:REFerence ................906 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PORT:ORDer ..................907...
  • Page 904 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: EZD:COUPon:MEASure).
  • Page 905 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Load File" on page 632 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT: MEASure:FILename.
  • Page 906 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance <Boolean> Switches the impedance correction of the EZD tool ON or OFF. Its reference impe- dance and bandwidth limit parameters can be set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD: and CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit, IMPedance:REFerence respectively. This is a global setting. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 907 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the EZD tool. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 629 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:RUN:RUN Runs the EZD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ●...
  • Page 908 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD... Commands for AtaiTec's In Situ De-Embedding (ISD) tool, see http://ataitec.com/prod- ucts/isd/ ..............908 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:ATTenuation:BEHavior ..............909 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure ............. 909 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename ........... 909 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............909 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN ........... 910 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename ............910 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt .......... 910 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename ............
  • Page 909 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference RESonant The 2x thru test coupon will be split and used directly for deem- bedding (parameter value 3). This option may be more accurate when the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location Manual operation: "Test Coupons >...
  • Page 910 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Measure / Measure Open / Measure Short" on page 630 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:TYPE), this command loads the properties of the Open coupon from a Touchstone file.
  • Page 911 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Chapter 8.2.8, "Fixture modeling", on page 1527 Manual operation: "Active" on page 631 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:TYPE <CouponType> Sets/gets the coupon type to be measured for a fixture modeling with the ISD tool. Parameters: <CouponType>...
  • Page 912 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Load File" on page 632 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT: MEASure:FILename. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Load File" on page 632 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test fixture is connected.
  • Page 913 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:FTIMe:OVERride <Boolean> If set to true, the flight time for DUT + lead-in is specified using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD:FTIMe:DUT. Otherwise, it is calculated automatically. True is equivalent to setting the leadin_dut_time batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to auto.
  • Page 914 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PORT:ORDer <PortOrder> Defines how the ISD tool shall interpret the DUT + Fixture data (see CALCulate: FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure): ● NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2*N are on the right ●...
  • Page 915 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the ISD tool. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 629 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:RUN:RUN Runs the ISD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that ●...
  • Page 916 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <AttenLeadInScaling> Manual operation: "Scaling for attenuation" on page 636 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:SCALe:FREQuency <MaxFrequency> Defines the maximum frequency to deembed. Corresponds to the max_frequency batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Parameters: <MaxFrequency> Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "Max Freq to Deembed"...
  • Page 917 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD... Commands for PacketMicro's Smart Fixture De-embedding (SFD), see https:// www.packetmicro.com/Products/sfd-tool.html ..................917 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:AUTO ..............917 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure ............ 918 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename .......... 918 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............918 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] ................. 918 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:TYPE ..................918 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DIFFcfg ................919 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure ............919 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename...
  • Page 918 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command loads the coupon properties from a Touchstone file. The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:TYPE. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory).
  • Page 919 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation: "2x Thru Port Ordering"...
  • Page 920 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:IMPedance <Boolean> Enables/disables the impedance correction of the SFD tool. This is a global setting. Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Impedance correction enabled OFF (0) Impedance correction disabled Manual operation: "Use Impedance Correction" on page 629 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the SFD tool.
  • Page 921 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Apply" on page 634 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:TOTaldiffcfg <SFDPortConfig> Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture. Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation:...
  • Page 922 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:REName <Boolean> If set to ON (1), the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Output Settings"...
  • Page 923 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ..............937 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE ................938 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................938 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................939 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............939 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Resets the circle test for the active trace of channel <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation:...
  • Page 924 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:FORMat POLar CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay ON Activate a polar diagram and show the circle limit line in the dia- gram.
  • Page 925 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the circle limit check on or off. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U.
  • Page 926 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StartStim> <StopStim> Pairs of stimulus values, each pair confining a limit line segment. See also Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 145.
  • Page 927 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA <Type>, <StartStim>, <StopStim>, <StartResp>, <StopResp> Defines the limit line type, the stimulus and response values for a limit line with an arbi- trary number of limit line segments. See Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 145.
  • Page 928 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA <CenterX>, <CenterY>, <Radius> Defines the display circle for the active trace of channel <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterX> X position (real part) of the display circle's center <CenterY>...
  • Page 929 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 1.5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1.5 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2 dB and +3 dB.
  • Page 930 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. CALC:LIM:STAT:AREA LEFT, TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy, move the pass/fail message to the top left position.
  • Page 931 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer/UPPer sets the type and response values of even/odd limit line segments and gets the response values of even/odd limit line seg- ments - no matter what the current type of these segments actually is! Both commands will only work, if the total number of limit line segments is even.
  • Page 932 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW -10, 0, 0, -10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range. Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition. CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 10, 10, 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments .
  • Page 933 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt <LimShift> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt <LimShift> These commands shift all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction. Both commands shift all limit lines; they have the same func- tionality.
  • Page 934 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST :SENSe1:FREQuency1:STARt 1 GHZ; STOP 5 GHZ :SENSe1:SWEep:POINts 5 After a reset, modify the default trace 'Trc1'. :CALCulate1:LIMit1:DATA 1, 1000000000, 2000000000, -40, -30 :CALCulate1:LIMit2:DATA 1, 4000000000, 5000000000, -30, -40 Define upper limit lines for freqency ranges [1 GHz, 2 GHz] and [4 GHz, 5 GHz] :CALCulate1:LIMit1:POINts:UPPer? 'Trc1' Query the limit lines.
  • Page 935 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5;...
  • Page 936 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST SENS:FREQ:STAR 1GHz SENS:FREQ:STOP 3GHz CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz, 2GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM '22-(20/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM:STAT ON CALC:LIM:SEGM2:FORM '15-(6/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM2:TYPE LMIN CALC:LIM:DISP ON CALC:LIM:STAT ON Manual operation: "Linear/Formula" on page 381 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe <State> Defines whether a custom formula is used for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace.
  • Page 937 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 378 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <FreqPowTime> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP <StimVal> These commands change the start and stop stimulus values (i.e. the smallest and the largest stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
  • Page 938 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <LimLineType> LMIN | LMAX | OFF Limit line type Range: LMAX (upper limit line segment), LMIN (lower limit line segment), OFF (limit check switched off, limit line segment not deleted) *RST:...
  • Page 939 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON;...
  • Page 940 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; TTL2 ON Switch the limit check on and activate the TTL out pass 2 signal. Manual operation: "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass"...
  • Page 941 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ........950 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute ............951 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? ........951 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? ............. 952 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPAN ............952 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:STARt .............952 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:STOP ........... 952 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:STARt ..........952 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:STOP ................953 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE ............953 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:MODE ..............953 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion ............954 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe ..............954 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold ............
  • Page 942 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK1 ON; MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:AOFF Remove both markers. Usage: Event Manual operation:...
  • Page 943 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area. CALC:MARK:BWID 6 Select a 6-dB bandwidth for the bandstop.
  • Page 944 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Marker coupling is enabled using CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] Changing the coupling type automatically disables marker coupling throughout the recall set. Parameters: <Type> ALL | CHANnel | DIAGram Marker coupling mode recall set-wide CHANnel channel-wide DIAGram diagram-wide Example:...
  • Page 945 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference SCPI POLar "Real Imag" COMPlex (for R&S ZVR compatibility) GDELay "Delay" REAL "Real" IMAGinary "Imag" "SWR" LINPhase "Lin Mag Phas"e MLPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) LOGPhase "dB Mag Phase" MDPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) IMPedance "R + j X"...

  • Page 946: Calculate:Marker:Excursion

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:DELTa[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the delta mode for marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn> on or off. The marker must be created before using ON. If the CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] active trace contains no reference marker, the command also creates a reference marker.

  • Page 947: Calculate:Marker:Format

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Excursion Settings" on page 401 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat <OutFormat> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FORMat <OutFormat> Sets/queries the output format for the (complex) value of the related marker. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 948 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.

  • Page 949: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] Assigns search range no. <NumSearchRange> to the related marker (marker <Mk> or the reference marker of channel <Chn>'s active trace). Selects the search range, e.g. to display range limit lines or define the start and stop values.

  • Page 950: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <Value> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 951: Calculate:Marker:Function:result

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON Create marker M1 and assign it to trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC MAX; RES? Move the created marker to the absolute maximum of the trace and query the stimulus and response value of the search result.

  • Page 952: Calculate:Marker:Function:span

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPAN Sets the span of the sweep range equal to the absolute value of the first coordinate of the active delta marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 953: Calculate:Marker:Mode

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:MODE <Mode> Defines the positioning mode of the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 940). The marker doesn't have to be created before, the mode can be assigned in advance. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 954 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the minimum excursion for multiple peak searches. to set the minimum peak excur- CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion sion. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 955: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]:Area

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <MarkerName> Marker name (string parameter) *RST: 'M1' for marker no. 1 etc. Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:NAME '&$% 1'; :CALC:MARK ON Create marker 1 named "&$% 1" and display the marker . CALC:MARK:REF ON CALC:MARK:REF:NAME 'Reference' Display the reference marker and rename it "Reference".
  • Page 956 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> Defines the format in which you want to specify the target value CALCulate<Chn>: for the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 940). MARKer<Mk>:TARGet Each marker may have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
  • Page 957 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created :CALCULATE1:MARKER1 ON Create/enable Marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:FUNCtion:SELect TARGet Select TARGet search mode for marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:SEARch:FORMat? Query the target format of marker 1. The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is "Phase".

  • Page 958: Calculate:Marker:Search:format

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: Suppose the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON; :CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC MAXimum Create marker no. 1 and assign it to trace no. 1. Activate a maxi- mum search for marker no. 1. CALC:MARK:SEAR:TRAC ON Enable the tracking mode for the created marker.
  • Page 959 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet <TargetSearchVal> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TARGet <TargetSearchVal> Defines the target value for the target search of marker the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 940). The target search can be activated using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:EXECute TARGet CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence: FUNCtion:EXECute TARGet.

  • Page 960: Calculate:Marker:Reference[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold:STATe <Active> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the marker-specific threshold for (single) peak searches with the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 940) . CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold CALCulate<Chn>: to set the threshold value. MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 961: Calculate:Marker:X

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference The marker stimulus can be set using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X or CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X, but the response value remains fixed. ARBitrary: freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value. Tracking is disabled. The marker stores the stimulus value and –...

  • Page 962: Calculate:Marker:Y

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <StimulusValue> If the marker mode of the related marker is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex (Polar, Smith, inverted Smith), this is the real part Re(z ) of the marker value z .
  • Page 963 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <ResponseValue> Setting (ARBitrary mode only): sets the vertical position of the marker in Y units of the current trace format. Query: returns the marker position formatted according to the current marker format (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FORMat CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:...
  • Page 964 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ● The expression in the second command refers to formatted trace data. In order to apply it, must be set to CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion NORMal and must be set to ON. CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:STATe Trace math for unformatted and formatted trace data can be used at the same time. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 965 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion <Mode> Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace. The first command applies to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data), the second to formatted trace data. Both methods can be combined. To apply the trace math, the corresponding mathematical mode must be switched on using and/or...
  • Page 966 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference The exact function of the command depends on the number of memory traces associ- ated to the active data trace: ● If no memory trace is associated to the active trace, a new memory trace is gener- ated.
  • Page 967 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'Trc1 / Mem2[Trc1]' Define a mathematical trace, dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace.
  • Page 968 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ................968 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? ............... 968 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog:SENDed? ..............969 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup ................970 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete .................971 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL ...............971 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL ..............971 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory ................971 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory ..............971 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:SGRoup ................972 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure ............... 972 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed ................973 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine ..............975 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed ................

  • Page 969: Calculate:Parameter:define:sgroup

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup <LogicalPort1>[, <LogicalPort2>]... Creates the traces for all S-parameters associated with a group of logical ports (S- parameter group). The traces can be queried using CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? Traces must be selected to become active traces; see CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SELect.
  • Page 970 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALC2:PAR:DEF:SGR 1,2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two-port S- parameters S . The traces are not displayed. DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S11' DISP:WIND:TRAC3:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S12' DISP:WIND:TRAC4:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S21' DISP:WIND:TRAC5:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S22' Display the four traces in the diagram no. 1. INIT2:CONT OFF;...

  • Page 971: Calculate:Parameter:delete

    ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL Deletes all traces in all channels of the active recall set, including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1. The manual control screen shows "No Trace". Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete Trace"...
  • Page 972 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, <Result> Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace. The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace (no second parameter; see example). Note: To create a new trace and at the same time assign the attributes, use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine.
  • Page 973 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name <Result> Measured quantity Manual operation: "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 285 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>, <Result> Creates a trace and assigns a channel number, a name and a measurement parame- ter to it.
  • Page 974 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 285 Table 7-4: String identifiers for measurement results Note: All port numbers in a result identifier refer to logical (=DUT) ports; to avoid ambiguities they must be represented by the same number of digits (e.g.
  • Page 975 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference 'B2D1/A1D1' | ... 'B02D01/A01D01' | ... Ratios of wave quantities with drive ports ... | 'B2D1/A1D1SAM' | 'B2D1/A1D1AVG' 'B2D1/ The strings SAM, AVG, AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a nor- A1D1AMP' | ...
  • Page 976 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Similar to CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine, but in presence of balanced ports this command distinguishes between ● single-ended S-parameters for logical ports (SSS<Li><Lj>) ● "raw" single-ended S-parameters referring to physical ports (S<Pi><Pj>) Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <TraceName>...
  • Page 977 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference ..................977 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar ..............977 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain ..................978 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA ................979 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DELete:ALL ............... 979 CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] ............... 979 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................980 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..................980 CALCulate:RIPPle:FAIL:ALL? ..............981 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............981 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent:COUNt? ............... 982 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit ............982 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult? ............983 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ..........983 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........
  • Page 978 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: SWE:TYPE POW Select a power sweep. CALC:RIPP:CONT:DOM PLIN Delete all existing ripple limit ranges and select level units for the domain of the active trace. CALC:RIPP:DATA 1, -10, -5, 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between -10 dBm and -5 dBm, assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB.
  • Page 979 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1, 1500000000, 2000000000, 3, 1, 2000000000, 3000000000, 5 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. Define and enable a second ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 2 GHz and 3 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +5 CALC:RIPP:DISP ON...
  • Page 980 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000, Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB.
  • Page 981 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat <UnitRef> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical unit of the ripple limit. The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle: CONTrol:DOMain. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters: <UnitRef>...
  • Page 982 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit <Limit> Defines the ripple limit for ripple limit range no. <Seg>. A range must be created first to enable this command (e.g. CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA). See Chapter 4.4.1.2, "Rules for ripple test definition", on page 147.
  • Page 983 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1, 1500000000, 2000000000, Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:STAT ON; SEGM:RES? Enable the limit check and query the result for the created range.
  • Page 984 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <StimValue> Stimulus values (unitless) confining the ripple limit range. The unit is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE). Range: Virtually no restriction for ripple limit ranges. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Default unit: NN *RST;...
  • Page 985 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 383 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the ripple test info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined positions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 986 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER <EvalRange> Selects one out of 10 evaluation ranges to be configured with the CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:DOMain:USER:SHOW, CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain: USER:STARt, and com- CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP mands. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <EvalRange>...
  • Page 987 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Parameters: <Stop> Start or stop value of the evaluation range. Default unit: NN Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER Manual operation: "Evaluation Range" on page 360 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak"...
  • Page 988 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: dBValue Compression value Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 358 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue>...
  • Page 989 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW <Boolean> Displays or hides range limit lines for the reference range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref.
  • Page 990 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 359 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel, for phase formatted traces it is set via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe.
  • Page 991 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 360 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation. Only applies if is set CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:REFerence...
  • Page 992 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 358 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? <Result> Returns a single statistical parameter of the trace no. <Chn> or all parameters. It is not necessary to display the info field (CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] before using this command.
  • Page 993 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev/RMS" on page 355 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RMS[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "RMS" and the "Flatness/Gain/Slope" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 994 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the statistics info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined posi- tions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos>...
  • Page 995 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference See also CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:DTFault:STOP. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Center>/<Span> Center/span value. Default unit: m Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer 2; SPAN 2 Defines the DtF distance window of the active trace of channel 1 via its center (2m) and span (2m).
  • Page 996 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 733 Table 7-5: Example: frequency-dependent attenuation table Frequency Attenuation 1 GHz 0.01 dB/m 2 GHz 0.015 dB/m 3 GHz 0.012 dB/m CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete <DtfDeleteCable> Deletes the user-defined cable type with the given name.
  • Page 997 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<FaultNo> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace and DtF limit checking is enabled, this query returns the peak data of DtF limit violation <FaultNo> <FaultNo>...
  • Page 998 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeakThreshold> Fault limit *RST: -20 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold -30 sets the DtF limit to -30 dB.
  • Page 999 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect <DtfSelectCable> Selects one of the available (predefined or user-defined) cable types for Distance to Fault measurements. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <DtfSelectCable> Name of the cable type. Example: CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect '5088-HFLR' Selects cable type "5088-HFLR".
  • Page 1000 ® Command reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Distance to Fault" on page 728 CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... The CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... commands control the transformation into the time domain (see Chapter 4.7.2, "Time domain analysis", on page 222)..............1000 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer ............

This manual is also suitable for:

Znbt seriesZnb4Znb8Znb20Znb26Znb40 ... Show all

Table of Contents